LL1J 19A321 AB
2020 EXPEDITION Owner’s Manual
ford.ca
owner.ford.com
2020 EXPEDITION Owner’s Manual
August 2020
Third Printing
Litho in U.S.A.
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2020
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201907 20200702123314
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and
maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle
in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................7
Symbols Glossary ............................................7
Data Recording .................................................9
Perchlorate .......................................................13
Ford Credit ........................................................13
Replacement Parts Recommendation
...........................................................................14
Special Notices ...............................................14
Mobile Communications Equipment
............................................................................15
Export Unique Options ................................16
Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................17
At a Glance
Instrument Panel ...........................................18
Child Safety
General Information .....................................20
Installing Child Restraints ..........................22
Booster Seats ..................................................31
Child Restraint Positioning ........................33
Child Safety Locks ........................................35
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation ..................................37
Fastening the Seatbelts .............................38
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................42
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................43
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................43
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ...............................................45
Seatbelt Extensions .....................................45
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™ .........................47
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation .................................48
Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................49
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........50
Side Airbags ....................................................52
Safety Canopy™ ............................................53
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......54
Airbag Disposal ..............................................55
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................56
Remote Control .............................................56
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
..........................................................................63
MyKey™
Principle of Operation .................................64
Creating a MyKey ..........................................65
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................66
Checking MyKey System Status .............66
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems ........................................................67
MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................67
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ...............................69
Keyless Entry ...................................................72
Liftgate
Manual Liftgate ..............................................76
Power Liftgate .................................................77
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System .........................81
Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................83
Power Running Boards
Using Power Running Boards ...................85
1
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................87
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................87
Audio Control .................................................88
Voice Control ..................................................89
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control ............................................89
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control ..........................................................89
Information Display Control .....................89
Heated Steering Wheel ..............................89
Horn ...................................................................90
Adjustable Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals .....................................91
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers ........................................92
Autowipers ......................................................92
Windshield Washers ....................................93
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ..........93
Lighting
General Information ....................................94
Lighting Control .............................................94
Autolamps .......................................................95
Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................95
Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................95
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running Lamps
..........................................................................96
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .........96
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................96
Direction Indicators .......................................97
Interior Lamps ................................................97
Ambient Lighting ..........................................98
Automatic High Beam Control
What Is Automatic High Beam Control
..........................................................................99
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off ..................................................99
Automatic High Beam Control Indicators
..........................................................................99
Overriding Automatic High Beam Control
..........................................................................99
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows ............................................101
Global Opening and Closing ....................101
Exterior Mirrors .............................................102
Interior Mirror .................................................103
Childminder Mirror ......................................104
Sun Visors ......................................................104
Moonroof ........................................................105
Liftgate Window ..........................................106
Instrument Cluster
Gauges .............................................................107
Warning Lamps and Indicators ...............110
Audible Warnings and Indicators ............113
Information Displays
General Information ....................................114
Information Messages ...............................123
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control ............................139
Automatic Climate Control .......................141
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Automatic
Temperature Control ..............................143
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Manual Temperature
Control .........................................................144
Rear Passenger Climate Controls -
Vehicles With: Automatic
Temperature Control .............................145
2
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Rear Passenger Climate Controls -
Vehicles With: Manual Temperature
Control ........................................................146
Heated Windshield ......................................147
Heated Rear Window .................................148
Heated Exterior Mirrors .............................148
Cabin Air Filter ..............................................148
Remote Start ................................................148
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position .................150
Head Restraints ...........................................150
Manual Seats ................................................154
Power Seats ..................................................154
Memory Function .........................................157
Rear Seats ......................................................158
Climate Controlled Seats .........................163
Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener ..............165
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ...............................169
Wireless Accessory Charger ....................170
Storage Compartments
Center Console ..............................................172
Overhead Console .......................................172
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information ....................................173
Ignition Switch ...............................................173
Keyless Starting ............................................173
Starting a Gasoline Engine .......................174
Engine Block Heater ....................................177
Unique Driving Characteristics
Auto-Start-Stop ...........................................179
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions ......................................182
Fuel Quality ....................................................182
Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................183
Running Out of Fuel ...................................183
Refueling .........................................................185
Fuel Consumption .......................................187
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law ................................................189
Catalytic Converter .....................................190
Transmission
Automatic Transmission ...........................193
Four-Wheel Drive
Using Four-Wheel Drive ..........................200
Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential ...........................208
Brakes
General Information ..................................209
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.......................................................................209
Electric Parking Brake ................................210
Hill Start Assist ..............................................211
Traction Control
Principle of Operation ................................213
Using Traction Control ...............................213
Stability Control
Principle of Operation ................................214
Using Stability Control ...............................215
Hill Descent Control
Principle of Operation ................................217
Using Hill Descent Control ........................217
3
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ................................218
Rear Parking Aid ...........................................219
Front Parking Aid ........................................220
Side Sensing System .................................222
Active Park Assist ........................................223
Rear View Camera .....................................230
360 Degree Camera ..................................233
Cruise Control
What Is Cruise Control ..............................236
Switching Cruise Control On and Off
........................................................................236
Setting the Cruise Control Speed .........236
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................237
Resuming the Set Speed ..........................237
Cruise Control Indicators ..........................237
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............237
Driving Aids
Driver Alert ....................................................244
Lane Keeping System ...............................245
Blind Spot Information System ............249
Cross Traffic Alert .......................................253
Steering ..........................................................256
Pre-Collision Assist ....................................257
Drive Control ..................................................261
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage ........................265
Cargo Nets .....................................................267
Roof Racks and Load Carriers ...............268
Load Limit .....................................................269
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................275
Trailer Reversing Aids ................................276
Trailer Sway Control ..................................285
Recommended Towing Weights ..........286
Essential Towing Checks .........................289
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels .....296
Driving Hints
Reduced Engine Performance ..............299
Economical Driving ....................................299
Breaking-In ...................................................300
Driving Through Water .............................300
Floor Mats .....................................................300
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance .................................302
Hazard Flashers ..........................................303
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................303
Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................304
Post-Crash Alert System .........................306
Transporting the Vehicle .........................306
Towing Points ...............................................307
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need .............308
In California (U.S. Only) ...........................309
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) .....................310
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) ........................311
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .........................................................311
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
.........................................................................313
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
.........................................................................313
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
.........................................................................313
Fuses
Fuse Box Locations .....................................315
Fuse Specification Chart ..........................315
Changing a Fuse ..........................................323
4
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Maintenance
General Information ..................................325
Opening and Closing the Hood .............325
Under Hood Overview ..............................326
Engine Oil Dipstick ......................................327
Engine Oil Check ..........................................327
Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................328
Changing the Engine Air Filter ...............329
Engine Coolant Check ..............................329
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................333
Transfer Case Fluid Check .......................334
Brake Fluid Check .......................................334
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................335
Changing the 12V Battery ........................335
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................337
Washer Fluid Check ...................................338
Fuel Filter .......................................................339
Checking the Wiper Blades ....................339
Changing the Wiper Blades ....................339
Removing a Headlamp ............................340
Changing a Bulb .........................................340
Vehicle Care
General Information ..................................343
Cleaning Products ......................................343
Cleaning the Exterior .................................344
Waxing ............................................................345
Cleaning the Engine ...................................345
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
........................................................................345
Cleaning the Interior ..................................346
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ......................346
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................347
Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............348
Cleaning the Wheels .................................348
Vehicle Storage ...........................................348
Wheels and Tires
General Information ...................................351
Tire Care .........................................................353
Using Snow Chains ....................................367
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........368
Changing a Road Wheel ...........................372
Technical Specifications ..........................378
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications ...............................380
Motorcraft Parts .........................................380
Vehicle Identification Number ...............382
Vehicle Certification Label ......................383
Transmission Code Designation ...........383
Capacities and Specifications ...............384
Bulb Specification Chart ..........................392
Connected Vehicle
Connected Vehicle Requirements .......394
Connected Vehicle Limitations .............394
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network .....................................................394
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network .....................................................394
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting
........................................................................395
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot .........397
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password .................................397
Audio System
General Information ..................................398
Audio Unit - Vehicles Without:
Touchscreen Display .............................398
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Touchscreen
Display .........................................................401
Digital Radio .................................................402
Satellite Radio .............................................405
5
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
USB Port ........................................................407
SYNC™
General Information .................................409
Using Voice Recognition ...........................410
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ............412
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......413
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
.........................................................................416
SYNC™ Troubleshooting ..........................417
SYNC™ 3
General Information ..................................426
Using Voice Recognition ..........................428
Entertainment .............................................435
Climate ...........................................................445
Phone ..............................................................447
Navigation .....................................................449
Apps ................................................................454
Settings ..........................................................457
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ....................459
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................472
Ford Protect
Ford Protect ..................................................473
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information .......475
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........478
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance .............................................481
Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........483
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............494
End User License Agreement .................497
Declaration of Conformity .......................522
Declaration of Conformity - Vehicles
With: SYNC 3 ............................................522
6
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may
take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
7
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Introduction
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
8
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Introduction
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Service engine soon
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
E163957
Hill descent control
E272858
Trail control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
We respect your privacy and are
committed to protecting it. The
information contained in this publication
was correct at the time of going to print,
but as technology rapidly changes, we
recommend that you visit the regional Ford
website for the latest information.
9
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Introduction
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have data recording functionality and
the ability to permanently or temporarily
store data. This data could include
information on the condition and status of
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance
requirements, events and malfunctions.
The types of data that can be recorded are
described in this section. Some of the data
recorded is stored in event logs or error
logs.
Note: Error logs are reset following a service
or repair.
Note: We may provide information in
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third
parties acting with lawful authority or
through a legal process. Such information
could be used by them in legal proceedings.
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Operating states of system
components, for example, fuel level,
tire pressure and battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example, wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt
status.
• Events or errors in essential systems,
for example, headlamps and brakes.
• System responses to driving situations,
for example, airbag deployment and
stability control.
• Environmental conditions, for example,
temperature.
Some of this data, when used in
combination with other information, for
example, an accident report, damage to a
vehicle or eyewitness statements, could
be associated with a specific person.
Service Data
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, for example, your contact information,
to offer you products or services that may
interest you. Data may be provided to our
service providers such as part suppliers
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data.
We retain this data only as long as
necessary to perform these functions or to
comply with law. We may provide
information where required in response to
official requests to law enforcement or
other government authorities or third
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if
equipped), if you choose to use connected
apps and services, you consent that certain
diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
10
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Introduction
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries.
Event Data
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
event data recorder is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger seatbelts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder.
Comfort, Convenience and
Entertainment Data
Your vehicle has electronic control units
that have the ability to store data based
on your personalized settings. The data is
stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
that you connect to it, for example, a USB
drive or digital music player. You can delete
some of this data and also choose whether
to share it through the services to which
you subscribe. See Settings (page 457).
Comfort and Convenience Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Seat and steering wheel position.
• Climate control settings.
• Radio presets.
11
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Introduction
Entertainment Data
Data recorded includes, for example:
• Music, videos or album art.
• Contacts and corresponding address
book entries.
• Navigation destinations.
Services That We Provide
If you use our services, we collect and use
data, for example, account information,
vehicle location and driving characteristics,
that could identify you. We transmit this
data through a dedicated, protected
connection. We only collect and use data
to enable your use of our services to which
you have subscribed, with your consent or
where permitted by law. For additional
information, see the terms and conditions
of the services to which you have
subscribed.
Services That Third Parties
Provide
We recommend that you review the terms
and conditions and data privacy
information for any services to which you
subscribe. We take no responsibility for
services that third parties provide.
Vehicles With a Modem (If Equipped)
The modem has a SIM. The
modem was enabled when your
vehicle was built and periodically
sends messages to stay connected to the
cell phone network, receive automatic
software updates and send vehicle-related
information to us, for example, diagnostic
information. These messages could
include information that identifies your
vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial
number of the modem. Cell phone network
service providers could have access to
additional information, for example, cell
phone network tower identification. For
additional information about our privacy
policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
refer to your local Ford website.
Note: The modem continues to send this
information unless you disable the modem
or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
data by changing the modem settings. See
Connected Vehicle (page 394).
Note: The service can be unavailable or
interrupted for a number of reasons, for
example, environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
modem, visit www.FordConnected.com.
Vehicles With SYNC
Mobile Device Data
If you connect a mobile device to your
vehicle, you can display data from your
device on the touchscreen for example,
music and album art. You can share your
vehicle data with mobile apps on your
device through the system. See Apps
(page 454).
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the
United States. The data is encrypted and
includes the vehicle identification number
of your vehicle, the SYNC module serial
number, odometer, enabled apps, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain it only as long as necessary to
provide the service, to troubleshoot, for
continuous improvement and to offer you
products and services that may be of
interest to you according to your
preferences and where allowed by law.
12
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Introduction
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to
that cell phone. The cell phone profile
enables more mobile features and efficient
operation. The profile contains, for
example, data from your phonebook, read
and unread text messages and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system.
If you connect a media device, the system
creates and retains a media device index
of supported media content. The system
also records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity.
The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when you
connect your cell phone or media device.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you use the
master reset function to erase the stored
information. See Settings (page 457).
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's module.
For additional information about our
privacy policy, refer to your local Ford
website.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
connectivity technology, visit
www.FordConnected.com.
Vehicles With an Emergency Call
System
When the emergency call system is active,
it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or activation
of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
or updates to the emergency call system
may also be capable of electronically or
verbally disclosing to emergency services
operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
emergency services operators to provide
the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not activate the emergency
call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
call systems that are required by law.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for
more information about Ford Credit and
access to the online Account Manager tool,
visit www.ford.com/finance.
13
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Introduction
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet
or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents happen sometimes.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty.
The Ford Warranty may not cover damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts.
For additional information, refer to the
terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, see your warranty guide that is
available online. For more information,
refer to our website and download your
copy of the warranty guide.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: You risk death or
serious injury to yourself and others if you
do not follow the instruction highlighted
by the warning symbol. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD
can occur.
14
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of unapproved
aftermarket plug-in devices. The vehicle
Warranty will not cover damage caused
by an aftermarket plug-in device.
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks
and Utility Type Vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.
Using Your Vehicle With a
Snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for
snowplowing.
Your vehicle does not have a snowplowing
package.
Using Your Vehicle as an
Ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an
ambulance.
Your vehicle does not have the Ambulance
Preparation Package.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may
take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
15
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Introduction
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
16
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www.sustainability.ford.com.
17
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E251633
Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 97).A
Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 92).B
Information display controls. See Information Displays (page 114).C
Instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 107).D
Navigation, media, phone.E
Entertainment display.F
Hazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 303).G
Audio. See Audio System (page 398).H
Climate control. See Climate Control (page 139).I
Rear defrost.J
Start button. See Keyless Starting (page 173).K
Voice control. See Voice Control (page 89).L
18
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
At a Glance
Horn.M
Cruise control. See Cruise Control (page 236).N
Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 87).O
Parking brake release. See Brakes (page 209).P
Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 94).Q
19
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their
recommendations for child restraints on
probable child height, age and weight
thresholds, or on the minimum
requirements of the law. We recommend
that you check with a NHTSA Certified
Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) to make sure that you properly
install the child restraint in your vehicle
and that you consult your pediatrician to
make sure you have a child restraint
appropriate for your child. To locate a
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca
to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your
area. Failure to properly restrain children
in child restraints made especially for
their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or
death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
20
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended Restraint
Type
Child Size, Height, Weight, or AgeChild
Use a child restraint
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less
than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat backrest
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended
by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
• You are required by law to properly use
child restraints for infants and toddlers
in the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb
(36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position.
• When installing a rear facing child
restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to
avoid interference between the child
restraint and the vehicle seat in front
of the child restraint.
21
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Properly
restrain children 12 and under in the rear
seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
restraint and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
• For second-row seating positions,
adjust the recliner slightly to improve
child restraint fit. If needed, remove the
head restraints.
• For third-row seating positions, stow
the head restraints to improve child
restraint fit. See Head Restraints
(page 150).
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
22
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
Standard seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
23
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once the extra weight
of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child restraint
to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight
lean toward the buckle provides extra
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
24
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Inflatable seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
25
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child restraint for installation. The ability
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once the extra weight
of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child restraint
to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight
lean toward the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
26
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In
a crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the vehicle seatback and seat
cushion meet (called the seat bight) and
one top tether anchor behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint if the
lower anchors are not used. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
also attach the top tether strap to the
proper top tether anchor if a top tether
strap has been provided with your child
restraint. We recommend the use of a child
safety seat having a top tether strap. See
Using Tether Straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
Second Row Bench Seat
E251314
27
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Second Row Bucket Seats
E251315
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seatback, below the locator symbols on
the seatback. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions to properly
install a child restraint with LATCH
attachments.
E144054
The locator symbols are on round plastic
buttons for the center seat and on
rectangular tags for the outboard seats.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to the vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
Some of the rear seats of your vehicle have
built-in tether strap anchors behind the
seats as described below.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view).
28
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Second Row Bench Seat
E251316
Second Row Bucket Seats
E251319
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the
correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the seatbelt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child
restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when
the child is seated in it. Keep the tether
strap just snug without lifting the front of
the child restraint. Keeping the child
restraint just touching the vehicle seat
gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
29
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Second Row Seating Positions
E251593
Second Row Bucket Seating Positions
E251594
30
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
1. For center seating positions, route the
child safety seat tether strap over the
back of the seat. For outboard seating
positions, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the
head restraint posts. If the top of the
safety seat hits the head restraint,
recline the seat back slightly to obtain
proper fit.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Third Row Seating Positions
E251595
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat.
2. Clip the tether strap to the anchor. If
the tether strap is clipped incorrectly,
the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a
crash.
3. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. If the safety seat is not
anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly
increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable seatbelt.
31
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children
use approved booster seats until they
reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
32
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
33
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seating position whenever possible. If
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
properly secure the largest child on the
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint
device is appropriate for your child's size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions and
warnings provided for installation and
use in conjunction with the instructions
and warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the
child may increase the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows,
books or towels to boost your child's
height. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
34
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined
Weight of
Child and
Child
Restraint
Restraint
Type
Seatbelt
Only
Seatbelt
and LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
Seatbelt
and Top
Tether
Anchor
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
Only)
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
150).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
35
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
E249891
The locks are on the rear edge of each rear
door and must be set separately for each
door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn it clockwise to switch the child lock
on and counterclockwise to switch it off.
See Keys and Remote Controls (page
56).
Right-Hand Side
Turn it counterclockwise to switch the child
lock on and clockwise to switch it off.
36
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always
be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger
hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
assembly made up of one buckle and
one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder
belt under the arm. Never use a single
seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats
may be hot in a vehicle that is in the
sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may
burn a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
of the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt
and rear inflatable seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
37
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners and rear
inflatable seatbelts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The seatbelt
pretensioners at the front seating positions
are designed to tighten the seatbelts firmly
against the occupant’s body when
activated. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the seatbelts. In frontal
crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the seatbelt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure you securely fasten
the tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
38
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
E275033
The retractor for the third row center
seatbelt is in the roof.
To fasten the seatbelt:
1. Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if
you pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on
a slope.
2. Insert the smaller tongue into the
smaller buckle to the left of the center
seat.
3. Pull the larger tongue across the lap
and insert it into the buckle to the right
of the center seat.
Note: If in constant use, you can leave the
belt buckled in the smaller buckle. When it
is not in use, or when you fold or move the
rear seats, you should release the belt from
the smaller buckle. Using the tongue of the
adjacent seatbelt, press the red button on
the smaller buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion
of the seatbelt snugly and low across
the hips. Position the shoulder portion of
the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See
the following figure.
39
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is
involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
and associated components inspected
as soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seatbelts have both
the vehicle sensitive locking mode and the
automatic locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode when you install a child
safety seat, except a booster, in the
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in a rear seating position whenever
possible. See Seatbelts (page 37).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Non-Inflatable Seatbelts
40
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This indicates the
seatbelt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
Rear Outermost Inflatable Seatbelts
(Second Row Only–If Equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until you pull the entire
belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outermost seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when you properly install them. This
is because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag in the shoulder
seatbelt webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
41
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front seatbelts.
• Impact sensors in various parts of the
vehicle.
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The rear inflatable seatbelts function like
standard restraints in everyday usage.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.
E146365
The fully inflated seatbelt's increased
diameter more effectively holds the
occupant in the appropriate seating
position, and spreads crash forces over
more area of the body than regular
seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure on
the chest and helps control head and neck
motion for passengers.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes,
side impact crashes and rollovers. The fact
that the rear inflatable seatbelt did not
inflate in a crash does not mean that
something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the
type sufficient to cause activation.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the seatbelt
height adjuster so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the seatbelt properly
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury in
a crash.
42
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
E146191
To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
the button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and
the indicator chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
chime turn off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
warning lamp is illuminated and the indic-
ator chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...
SEATBELT REMINDER
Front Seats
WARNING: The system will only
provide protection when you use the
seatbelt correctly.
This feature provides audio and visual
reminders for the front seatbelts.
E71880
This lamp illuminates and a
warning tone sounds if you do
not fasten your seatbelt when
you switch the ignition on. The lamp and
tone switch off when you fasten your
seatbelt or about one minute has elapsed.
When the initial warning expires for the
driver, more warnings are provided for the
driver and front outermost passenger. This
lamp illuminates and a warning tone
sounds if you or your front passenger do
not fasten the seatbelt buckle and the
vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (9.7 km/h).
To deactivate the warning, see
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature.
43
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do
not place large objects on the front
passenger seat.
Seatbelt Monitor (If Equipped)
This feature provides the driver with visual
only feedback for the seatbelts.
E206718
This lamp illuminates when you
switch the ignition on, identifying
the number of seating positions
with fastened buckles. It illuminates again
when a seating position changes from
unfastened to fastened.
E313730
This warning displays and a tone sounds
if an occupant unfastens the rear seatbelt
buckle or it becomes unfastened.
Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an
occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle
to begin with, the warning will not display.
Note: Front seating positions appear in this
warning display. Warnings for unfastened
front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial
warning lamp.
Seatbelt Status
To view the seatbelt status, use the
information display controls on the
steering wheel. See General Information
(page 114).
E274570
E274703
Seatbelt fastened.A
Seatbelt not fastened.B
Seatbelt recently unfastened.C
FaultD
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature - Front outermost
seats only
WARNING: While the system
allows you to deactivate it, this system
is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an
accident. We recommend you leave the
system activated for yourself and others
who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this terminates the process.
44
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
Read Steps 1 - 4 before starting the
procedure.
Make sure that:
• You set the parking brake.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• You close all vehicle doors.
• You unbuckle the driver and front
passenger seatbelts.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning lamp
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional five seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
you start Step 3, you must complete
the procedure within 60 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
seatbelt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning lamp
turns on.
4. When the seatbelt warning lamp is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning lamp
flashes for confirmation.
• This switches the feature off if it is
currently on.
• This switches the feature on if it is
currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
restraint seatbelts to make sure there are
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a
crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 343).
SEATBELT EXTENSIONS
WARNING: Persons who fit into
the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of
a crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by our dealers.
The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle,
model year and seating position. The use
of an extension intended for another
vehicle, model year or seating position
may not offer you the full protection of
your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
45
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the way the seatbelt fits
across the torso, over the lap or to make
the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
extensions made by the original equipment
seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
is compatible with your vehicle restraint
system.
46
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seatbelts
This system provides an improved overall
level of frontal crash protection to front
seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related
injuries. The system analyzes different
occupant conditions and crash severity
before activating the appropriate safety
devices to help better protect occupants
in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
front seatbelt usage sensors, driver
seat position sensor, front passenger
sensing system and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or
both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
47
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury
from a deploying airbag is the greatest
close to the trim covering the airbag
module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch
them after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
48
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the
steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and passenger front airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 54).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant's chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
49
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
E181984
The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator which
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled). The indicator
lamp is in the center stack of the
instrument panel.
Note: When you first switch the ignition on,
the passenger airbag status indicator off
and on lamps illuminate for a short period
to confirm it is functional.
50
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions:
• The front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is
present in a child restraint.
• A passenger takes their weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• If there is a problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing
system.
Even with this technology, parents are
strongly encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the off lamp and stays lit
to remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
• If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the on lamp, then
switch your vehicle off, remove the
child restraint from your vehicle and
reinstall the restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer's
instructions.
The front passenger sensing system works
with sensors that are part of the front
passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the on lamp and remains
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
status indicator off lamp is lit, it is possible
that the person is not sitting properly in the
seat. If this happens:
• Switch your vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seat backrest in an
upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
• Restart your vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This allows the system
to detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator off lamp remains lit
even after this, you should advise the
person to ride in the rear seat.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat backrest,
and centered on the seat cushion, with
their feet comfortably extended on the
floor. Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases.
If you think that the state of the passenger
airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect,
check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
• Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
• Objects stowed in the seat backrest
map pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat.
51
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat may appear
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
described in the previous list.
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 54).
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering
with the seat, take the following steps to
remove the obstruction:
• Pull your vehicle over.
• Switch your vehicle off.
• Driver or adult passengers should
check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat
or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart your vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify
that the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster is no longer
illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster remains illuminated,
this may or may not be a problem due
to the front passenger sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact your
Customer Relationship Center.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory
seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of
the side airbags and increase the risk of
injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
52
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
The side airbags are on the outermost side
of the seat backrests of the front seats.
The airbag was designed to inflate
between the door panel and occupant to
further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are found
on your vehicle.
• Side airbags inside the seat backrest
of the driver and front passenger seats.
E67017
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 54).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
headliner at the siderail that may come
into contact with a deploying curtain
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could
injure you as it deploys from the
headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
53
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
The Safety Canopy deploys during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be
activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 54).
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your
vehicle (including hood, bumper system,
frame, front end body structure, tow
hooks and hood pins) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not
modify or add equipment to the front
end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module which deploys (activates) the
front seatbelt pretensioners, the adaptive
steering column, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, rear inflatable belts, seat mounted
side airbags, and the Safety Canopy. Based
on the type of crash, the restraints control
module will deploy the appropriate safety
devices.
54
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. See Instrument Cluster (page
107). Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after you
switch the ignition on.
• The readiness light either flashes or
stays lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the seatbelt
pretensioners and rear inflatable belts
is to activate in frontal, near-frontal
and side crashes, and in rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. Side airbags may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
55
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 56).
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Equipped)
Note: A two-button remote control
operates similarly.
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
transmitter functions as a programmed
ignition key that operates all the locks and
starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
control.
56
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
E191532
Press the button to release the key blade.
Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
E305198
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.
57
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
E305199
Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Using the Key Blade
The key cylinder is under the driver side
door handle. To access the cylinder:
E251885
1. Pull the handle and hold it.
2. While holding the handle outward,
identify the cylinder and insert the key
blade into the slot.
3. Actuate the cylinder to unlock or lock
the door.
Replacing the Battery
WARNING: Keep batteries away
from children to prevent ingestion.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death. If
ingested, immediately seek medical
attention.
WARNING: If the battery
compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
58
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See Information Messages (page
123).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.
E191533
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert the screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.
59
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
7. Reinstall the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Key
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2450 or
equivalent.
E305199
1. Push the release button and pull the
key blade out.
E303824
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
60
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery cover and the key
blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
has an extended operating range.
If your vehicle has automatic climate
control, you can configure it to operate
when you remote start your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 139). A manual
climate control system will run at the
setting it was set to when you switched
your vehicle off.
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work
when any of the following conditions occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch the feature off in the
information display.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
61
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
StatusLED
Remote start
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful
Solid red
Request failed or
status not received
Blinking red
Status incompleteBlinking green
Remote Starting Your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start.
Note: Press the push button ignition switch
on the instrument panel once to exit remote
start.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 15 minutes, the
duration extends by another 15 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 10
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 30 minutes. You can extend
the engine running time duration to a
maximum of 30 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. Your
vehicle and the parking lamps
turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
than when starting due to ground reflection
and the added noise of your running
vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 114).
Memory Feature
You can program your intelligent access
key to recall memory positions. See
Memory Function (page 157).
62
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle.
63
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can program the
restrictions to all keys except one. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator
keys or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.
Standard Settings
Not every vehicle includes the features
listed below. If your vehicle has this
equipment, then you cannot change the
following settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™.
MyKey mutes the audio system until
drivers, and in some instances,
passengers, fasten their seatbelts.
Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not mute.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
• Certain driver alerts, stability systems
or parking aids turn on automatically
when you use the MyKey system. For
example, Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
departure warning or forward collision
warning. Note: MyKey drivers may be
able to turn the lane departure warning
feature off, but this feature turns back
on automatically with every new key
cycle.
• Restricted touchscreen operation in
some markets. For example, MyKey
may prevent manual navigation
destination input while the vehicle is in
any gear other than park (P) or when
the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
speed.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions, if this feature is available
in your market.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward
with an admin key.
64
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
MyKey™
Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in your information display, providing
choices to switch them on or off, or to select
a more specific setting.
• Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a
safe speed considering posted speed
limits and prevailing road conditions. The
driver is always responsible to drive in
accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so
could result in accident or injury.
• Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and
a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
• The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display
when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
the limited volume. MyKey also
disables the automatic volume control.
Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not limit.
• Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and
active for MyKey drivers. For example,
E911 or emergency assistance and the
do not disturb features stay on even if
a MyKey driver uses the feature's
control to switch it off. When selected,
you will not be able to turn off Advance
Trac or traction control (if your vehicle
has this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle has a
push-button start, place the remote
control into the backup slot. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
174).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to change the
settings of your MyKey. From the
MyKey menu select the option Create
MyKey. See Information Displays
(page 114).
65
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
MyKey™
4. Select Yes if you want to create the
key as MyKey. A confirmation message
appears on the screen.
5. Switch the ignition off.
You successfully created a MyKey. Make
sure you label it so you can distinguish it
from the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). See Programming
and Changing Configurable Settings.
Programming and Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to change the
settings of your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 114).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
The programmed restrictions apply
when you switch the vehicle off, open
and close the driver door and restart
your vehicle with the programmed key
or transmitter.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
need an admin key to change or clear your
MyKey settings. When you make any
changes to your MyKey settings, you change
the settings for every MyKey. You cannot
make individual changes to apply to certain
MyKeys.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status at once. To
clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use
the information display.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin clearing
your MyKey programming. See
Information Displays (page 114).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You
cannot remove the MyKey restrictions
individually.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 114).
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
66
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
MyKey™
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you
have for your vehicle and determine when
all MyKeys have been deleted.
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to determine how many admin
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
if an additional MyKey has been
programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential causesCondition
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you
place the transmitter into the backup slot.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
81).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key. There always
has to be at least one admin key.
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot program the configurable settings.
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 65).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 65).
67
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
MyKey™
Potential causesCondition
· Purchase a new key or transmitter from
your authorized dealer.
I lost the only admin key.
· Program a spare key or transmitter. You
may need to see your authorized dealer.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
81).
I lost a key.
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
68
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Door Lock Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch and interior
trunk release switch will not operate after
20 seconds. You must unlock your vehicle
with the remote control or keyless keypad,
or switch the ignition on, to restore function
to these switches. You can switch this
feature on or off in the information display.
Note: Switch the ignition on and off after
changing the setting in the information
display.
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any
time. The liftgate release button only
operates when the speed is less than
3 mph (5 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The direction
indicators will flash.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Reprogramming the Unlocking Function
Note: When you press the unlock button,
either all the doors unlock, or only the driver
door unlocks. Pressing the unlock button
again unlocks all the doors.
Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
on the remote control simultaneously for
at least four seconds with the ignition off.
The direction indicators flash twice to
confirm the change. The unlocking mode
applies to the remote control, keyless entry
keypad and intelligent access. You can
also change between the unlocking modes
using the information display. See
General Information (page 114).
To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
69
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the liftgate are
closed.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
alarm or remote start, the horn sounds
twice and the direction indicators do not
flash. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 114).
Opening the Liftgate
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the liftgate.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
General Information
You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
back of the door handle for unlocking and
a separate sensor on the face of each door
handle for locking.
The system does not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The key frequencies jam.
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 56).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E248553
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The
intelligent access system requires a brief
delay to authenticate your intelligent
access key fob.
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248554
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
At the Luggage Compartment
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, press the exterior
release button.
70
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock and the
horn sounds twice if the key is still in the
ignition.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
• Using the manual lock on the door.
• Locking the driver door with a key.
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
remote control.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key
inside your vehicle after you close the last
door. If the system finds a key, all of the
doors will immediately unlock and the horn
will sound twice, indicating that a key is
inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
To do this, lock your vehicle after you have
closed all the doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the front
of the door handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade
A key cylinder is located under the driver
side door handle. You can use your key
blade to manually lock and unlock the
driver side door. See Remote Control
(page 56).
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
71
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off, or to the
accessory position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 114).
Illuminated Entry (If Equipped)
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp
control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You press the push button ignition
switch.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access
Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on, it
shuts off when it detects a certain amount
of battery drain, or after 45 minutes.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
72
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
E138637
You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
Note: You must have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner's wallet card in the glove
box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also program up to five of
your own five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must press each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal entry
code through the information display.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set 5-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the
remote control.
• Switching the ignition on.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You need to have two programmed
keys for this procedure.
73
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
1. Insert a key into the ignition and switch
the ignition on for a few seconds.
2. Switch the ignition off and remove the
key.
3. Insert the second key into the ignition
and switch the ignition on.
The factory-set code will display for a few
seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
Locking and Unlocking
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking mode. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 69).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time (with the driver door closed). You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
Displaying the Factory-Set Code
Note: Do not place the device on the
wireless accessory charging area when
programming intelligent access keys.
Note: You can program a maximum of four
keys to your vehicle.
Read and understand all of the steps that
follow before you begin.
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access key readily accessible.
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Make sure that you switch off the ignition
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before
beginning and that they remain closed
throughout the procedure. Carry out all
steps within 30 seconds of starting the
sequence. Stop and wait for at least one
minute before starting again if you carry
out any steps out of sequence.
E256153
1. Access the backup slot.
74
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
2. With the buttons facing the rear of your
vehicle and the key ring facing upward,
place the first intelligent access key
into the backup slot inside the center
console.
3. Press the push button ignition switch
once and wait for a few seconds.
4. Press the push button ignition switch
again and remove the intelligent access
key from the center console.
5. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot in the center console,
then press the push button ignition
switch.
The factory-set code appears in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
75
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Doors and Locks
MANUAL LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. If you
are unable to fully close the liftgate,
open the air vents or the windows to
allow fresh air to enter your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
you are driving. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent cargo from falling out.
Opening the Liftgate
Manually Opening the Liftgate
E252962
1. Press the button inside the liftgate
handle.
2. Pull the liftgate upward.
Remote Control
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to unlatch the liftgate.
76
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Liftgate
Closing the Liftgate
E252964
A handle is inside the liftgate to help with
closing.
POWER LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: It is extremely
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. If you
are unable to fully close the liftgate,
open the air vents or the windows to
allow fresh air to enter your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Keep keys out of reach
of children. Do not allow children to
operate or play near an open or moving
power liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all
times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent cargo from falling out.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. If there is a problem
with the open or close request, one of the
following may occur:
• One tone sounds if the ignition is on
and the transmission is not in park (P).
• Three tones sound if the battery
voltage is below the minimum
operating voltage.
• One tone sounds if the vehicle speed
is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible strut failure. A repetitive tone
sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. Remove any excessive weight
from the liftgate. If the liftgate continues
to close after opening, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
77
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Liftgate
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power liftgate area
before using the power liftgate control.
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle,
for example a wall, garage door or another
vehicle may come into contact with the
moving liftgate. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
you are driving. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
From the Instrument Panel
With the transmission in park
(P), press the button on the
instrument panel.
Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within a
few seconds.
Outside Control
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
E252962
2. Press the button inside the liftgate
handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection and stop the power operation or
reverse its direction, replicate a strut failure,
or damage mechanical components.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Keep clear of the
liftgate when using the rear switch.
78
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Liftgate
E252965
Press and release the liftgate control
button.
Opening the Liftgate Window
See Liftgate Window (page 106).
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This
could damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when
it reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped
moving, you can also manually move it to
the desired height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control
button on the liftgate until a tone
sounds, indicating programming is
complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
to a different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height, even if you disconnect
the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after
you have programmed a lower height than
fully open, you can fully open the liftgate
by manually pushing it upward to the
maximum open position.
Obstacle Detection
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open when driving.
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. A tone sounds and the system
reverses to open. Once you remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
79
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Liftgate
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound.
Remove the obstacle to operate the
liftgate.
Switching the Power Liftgate On
or Off
You can switch the power liftgate on or off
through the vehicle settings menu. See
General Information (page 114).
When switched off, the liftgate only
unlatches and will not power open or close.
Using the Hands-Free Liftgate (If
Equipped)
Make sure you have a passive key within
3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
1. Stand behind your vehicle, and face the
liftgate.
2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion,
without pausing, under and away from
the rear bumper detection area.
3. The liftgate power opens or closes.
Vehicles Without a Trailer Hitch
E253664
The detection area is in the center of the
rear bumper.
Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch
E253799
The detection area is on the left-hand side
and right-hand side of the hitch, between
the exhaust and the hitch.
Avoid the following actions when using
hands-free opening:
• Making physical contact with the
bumper.
• Holding your foot under the bumper.
• Sweeping your foot from side to side,
or kicking at an odd angle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection and stop the power operation or
reverse its direction, replicate a strut failure,
or damage mechanical components.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
passive key away from the rear bumper
detection area when you wash your vehicle.
80
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Liftgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock™
The system is an engine immobilization
system. The intended design is to help
prevent the engine from starting unless a
coded key programmed to your vehicle is
used. Using the wrong key may prevent
the engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
If you switch the ignition on with a coded
key you disarm the vehicle. If you unlock
the doors with the touch handle you disarm
the alarm.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost
or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of
eight coded keys to your vehicle. All eight
can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle.
This procedure programs both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
81
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Security
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access key readily accessible.
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before
beginning and that they remain closed
throughout the procedure. Carry out all
steps within 30 seconds of starting the
sequence. Stop and wait for at least one
minute before starting again if you carry
out any steps out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
E256153
1. Access the backup slot.
82
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Security
2. Insert the first programmed key in the
backup slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
9. Wait five seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key
in the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
10. Once complete, the information
cluster displays a message
confirming the key has been
programmed. The direction indicators
flash and the horn sounds.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If it
still does not work, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The active anti-theft system is designed
to warn you in the event of unauthorized
vehicle entry and is also designed to help
prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle.
You can choose what is monitored by
arming the system in different ways. See
Information Displays (page 114).
The direction indicators flash and the horn
sounds if the system triggers while the
alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Using the System
You can select two levels of alarm security.
You can change the level of security when
the ignition is switched off through the
information display with the two options
below:
Perimeter Only (If Equipped)
Perimeter only monitors the following:
• Doors.
• Hood.
• Liftgate.
All Sensors (If Equipped)
All sensors monitors the following:
• Doors.
• Hood.
• Liftgate.
• Movement inside your vehicle.
• Change in vehicle inclination, for
example, unwanted towing.
Note: Do not choose all sensors monitor
mode when the vehicle is in transport or if
movement within the vehicle is likely to
occur.
Note: For correct operation of the interior
motion detection system, make sure you
close all the windows prior to arming the
system. This helps prevent accidental alarm
activation due to external influences.
Additionally, the interior motion sensing
system does not arm if any door is ajar.
83
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Security
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle
using the remote control or keyless entry
keypad. You can also lock your vehicle
using the lock sensor on the exterior door
handle if your vehicle is equipped with
intelligent access. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 69).
The direction indicators flash once after
you lock your vehicle. This indicates the
alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fully
arms after 20 seconds.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-armed mode.
• Unlock the doors with the remote
control or keyless entry keypad. If
equipped with intelligent access, you
can use the unlock sensor on the
exterior door handle. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 69).
• Switch the ignition on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door lock
cylinder to unlock your vehicle, then
switch the ignition on within 12
seconds.
84
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Security
USING POWER RUNNING
BOARDS
WARNING: In extreme climates,
excessive ice buildup may occur, causing
the running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving
before attempting to step on them. The
running boards will resume normal
function once the blockage is cleared.
WARNING: Turn off the running
boards before jacking or placing any
object under your vehicle. Never place
your hand between the extended running
board and your vehicle. A moving running
board may cause injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate
more slowly in cool temperatures.
Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Automatic Power Deploy
E166682
The running boards automatically extend
down and out when you open the door.
This can help you enter and exit your
vehicle.
Automatic Power Stow
When you close the doors, the running
boards return to the stowed position after
a two-second delay.
Manual Power Deploy
You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display. See
General Information (page 114).
Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when
the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enabling and Disabling
You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display. See General Information (page
114).
85
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
• When disabled (OFF), the running
boards move to the stowed position
regardless of the door position.
• When enabled (AUTO), the running
boards move back to the correct
positions based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction
and move to the end of travel if it
encounters an object while moving.
86
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 150).
E261502
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
position you prefer.
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 150).
E261582
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.
87
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Steering Wheel
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if
the steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it stops just short of the end of the
column position.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory
function. See Memory Function (page
157).
Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves up when you switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to
return the system to its previous settings.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 114).
Note: If you press any adjustment or
memory button when in easy exit mode, the
system cancels the operation.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the
column may move up and in.
AUDIO CONTROL
E291380
E291395
You can operate the following
functions with the control:
E265304
Press - to decrease volume level.
Press + to increase volume level.
E265045
Press to access the previous
media selection.
E265044
Press to access the next media
selection.
88
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Steering Wheel
E289636
Press repeatedly to scroll
through available audio sources.
Press to access phone mode or
to answer a phone call.
E265040
Press to end a phone call.
E268549
Press to silence the current
media
VOICE CONTROL
The controls are on the steering wheel.
E142599
Press and release to activate
voice recognition.
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL
E248613
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 237).
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: CRUISE CONTROL
E191329
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 237).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E191336
See Information Displays (page 114).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF
EQUIPPED)
The heated steering wheel button is on the
climate controls.
89
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Steering Wheel
Press the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and
off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
HORN
E270945
90
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING: Never use the pedal
adjustment controls when your feet are
on the accelerator or brake pedal when
the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
E176213
Farther.A
Closer.B
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 157).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in park (P).
91
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Adjustable Pedals (If Equipped)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E252762
• Rotate away from you for a short wipe
interval.
• Rotate toward you for a long wipe
interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
The feature uses a rain sensor that is in the
area around the interior mirror. The rain
sensor monitors the amount of moisture
on the windshield and turns on the wipers.
It adjusts the wiper speed by the amount
of moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield. You can switch this feature on
and off in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 114).
E205527
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers:
• Rotate toward you for low sensitivity,
the wipers operate when the sensor
detects a large amount of water on the
windshield.
• Rotate away from you for high
sensitivity, the wipers operate when
the sensor detects a small amount of
water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
92
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wipers and Washers
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
Autowipers Settings
Autowipers default to on and remain on
until you switch them off in the information
display. When you switch off autowipers,
the wipers operate in intermittent mode.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E205528
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer also
operates the front camera washer.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Rear Window Wiper Blade
E205529
Rotate the control to switch to select:
Interval LengthPosition
Short wipe interval.2
Long wipe interval.1
Off.0
Rear Window Washer
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to switch on the rear
window washer. When you release the
lever, wiping continues for a short period
of time.
93
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
Lamps off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
Headlamp High Beam
E308790
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
94
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Lighting
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam
E311233
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low
light situations or when the wipers operate.
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
are on the lighting control.
E291299
E291298
Repeatedly press one of the
buttons to adjust the brightness.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you again
or switching the ignition on.
95
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH:
CONFIGURABLE DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display. See
General Information (page 114).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. You switch the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or you release the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in
all switch positions.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME
RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight
conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
lighting control to any position except
headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On
or Off
Only switch the front fog lamps on during
reduced visibility.
You can switch the front fog lamps on if
any of the following occur:
• You set the lighting control to the
parking lamps position.
• You set the lighting control to the
headlamps position.
• You set the lighting control to the
autolamps position and the headlamps
are on.
The front fog lamp button is on the lighting
control.
Press the button to switch the
front fog lamps on or off.
96
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Lighting
Note: The brightness of the daytime running
lamps may decrease when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
Front Fog Lamp Indicator
It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
Push the lever up or down to use
the direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
Note: When in Tow/Haul mode, tap the
lever up or down to make the direction
indicators flash five times.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the all lamps on button on
the overhead console.
Front Interior Lamp
E262162
The front interior lamp switches are on the
overhead console.
Note: The position and availability of each
button on the overhead console depends
on your vehicle.
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
On
Press to switch all interior lamps
on.
Note: For vehicles without a lamps off
switch, press again to switch all interior
lamps off.
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
Off (If Equipped)
E262185
Press to switch all interior lamps
off.
Switching the Individual Map
Lamps On and Off
E262193
Press to switch the left-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
Press to switch the right-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
97
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Lighting
Interior Lamp Function
Press to switch the interior lamp
function on and off.
When the interior lamp function is off and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps stay off.
When the interior lamp function is on and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps turn on.
Note: The indicator lamp lights amber
when the door function is off.
Rear Interior Lamps
The rear interior lamps may be above the
rear seat or above the rear windows.
Press to switch the lamps on or
off.
Note: If the rear lamps are switched on
through the overhead console, you cannot
turn them off with the rear lamp switch.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
Select Vehicle.
Select Ambient Light.
E306304
Switching Ambient Lighting On
Drag the slider above zero brightness.
Adjusting the Brightness
Drag the slider left or right.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Drag the slider left to zero brightness.
98
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Lighting
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
ahead, the system turns the high beams
off. Low beams remain on.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH
BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 114).
Activating the Automatic High
Beam Control
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position to activate.
See Autolamps (page 95).
Note: Automatic high beams are not
available when autolamps are not turned
on.
When active, the high beams turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (52 km/h).
When active, the high beams turn off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
Note: The deactivation speed is lower on
curves.
Note: High beam reactivation may be
delayed in certain curvy road situations.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL INDICATORS
The indicator illuminates to
confirm when the system is
ready to assist.
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC
HIGH BEAM CONTROL
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the high beams on or off.
99
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Automatic High Beam Control
WARNING: You may need to
override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: You may need to
override the system during inclement
weather.
E308790
Push the lever away from you to switch
between high beam and low beam.
100
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Automatic High Beam Control
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
let them play with the power windows.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, verify they are free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the control to open the window.
Press again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window stops and reverses some
distance if it detects an obstacle when
closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: If you override
bounce-back, the window does not
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take
care when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
Window Lock
Press the control to lock or
unlock the rear window controls.
It illuminates when you lock the
rear window controls.
Accessory
The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND
CLOSING (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the remote control to open
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See General
Information (page 114).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
101
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING: When closing the
power windows, verify they are free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings.
To close the windows, press and hold the
remote control lock button. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the
lock or unlock button to stop movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not use an ice scraper on the
mirror glass or housing.
E176219
Left-hand mirror.A
Right-hand mirror.B
Adjustment control.C
Window lockout.D
Power-folding mirror control.E
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
The exterior mirrors automatically fold in
toward the glass after you place the
transmission into park (P), switch off the
vehicle, open and close the driver-side door
and lock the vehicle. The exterior mirrors
automatically unfold and return to their
driving position after you unlock the vehicle
and open and close the driver-side door.
You can switch this feature on and off
through the information display. See
General Information (page 114).
102
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
E170431
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control
on the door. The control lights and the
mirrors fold in toward the glass. Press the
control again to unfold the mirrors. The
control light turns off.
Note: If you use the power-folding control
to fold the mirrors on demand and the auto
fold feature is switched on through the
information display, you must use the
power-folding control again to unfold them.
Loose Mirror
If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time the mirrors
are manually folded.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 148).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 157).
Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically
dims with the auto-dimming interior mirror.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
Blind Spot Monitor
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 249).
360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)
See 360 Degree Camera (page 233).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
103
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Manual Dimming Mirror
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. A rear center
passenger or raised rear center head
restraint may also block light from reaching
the sensor.
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
CHILDMINDER MIRROR
On overhead consoles, the childminder
mirror allows the driver to view the rear
seating area.
WARNING: Do not use the
childminder mirror to view rearward
traffic, do not allow rear passengers to
distract you from the driving task, and
make sure the rear view mirror has a
clear view of rearward traffic. Failure to
do so could increase the risk of a crash
from an unseen vehicle, which may result
in serious injury.
E190497
Pull down the rear edge of the childminder
mirror to open. You can adjust the
childminder mirror to any position up to
full open to aid in visibility.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
104
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not let children play
with the moonroof or leave them
unattended in the vehicle. They may
seriously hurt themselves.
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, you should verify that it is free
of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation,
press the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E191272
Moonroof open. Press and
release to open the moonroof.
The moonroof stops short of the
fully opened position. Press and
release the control again to open
the moonroof fully.
A
Moonroof vent. Press and
release to vent the moonroof.
B
Sunshade open. Press and
release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens
automatically with the
moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof
C
closed. Note: The sunshade
stops short of its fully opened
position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the
sunshade fully, press the control
again.
Sunshade close. Press and
release to close the sunshade.
Note: The sunshade does not
fully close unless the moonroof
glass is fully closed.
D
Moonroof close. Press and
release to close the moonroof
from either the open or vent
positions.
E
105
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically reverses
some distance if an obstacle is detected
while closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close control within two
seconds after the roof comes to a stop
following a bounce-back reversal.
LIFTGATE WINDOW
Opening the Liftgate Window
Note: To avoid vehicle damage, use care
when operating the liftgate when the
liftgate window is open.
With the Outside Control Button
E252961
1. Press the release button.
2. Pull the liftgate glass upward.
106
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
4 Inch Display
E219638
Engine oil pressure gauge.A
Engine coolant temperature gauge.B
Fuel gauge.C
Transmission fluid temperature gauge.D
Speedometer.E
Information display.F
Tachometer.G
107
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
8 Inch Display
E299699
Engine oil pressure gauge.A
Engine coolant temperature gauge.B
Fuel gauge.C
Configurable. Transmission fluid temperature or turbo boost.D
Speedometer.E
Information display.F
Tachometer.G
108
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. At normal
operating temperature, the level indicator
is in the normal range. If the pressure gauge
falls below the normal range, stop your
vehicle, switch off the engine and check
the engine oil level. Add oil if needed. If the
oil level is correct, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator is in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let the
engine cool.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern can
cause the value to not only decrease but
also increase or stay constant for periods
of time.
Configurable Gauge
Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge
Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level
indicator is in the normal range. If the
transmission fluid temperature exceeds
the normal range, stop your vehicle as soon
as possible and verify the airflow is not
restricted by snow or debris blocking
airflow through the grille.
Special operating conditions such as
snowplowing, towing, or off-road use may
cause higher than normal operating
temperatures.
To lower the transmission temperature
into the normal range, alter the severity of
your driving conditions. Operating the
transmission for extended periods with the
gauge in the higher than normal area may
cause internal transmission damage. If the
gauge continues to show high
temperatures, see an authorized dealer.
109
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
Turbo Boost Gauge
Indicates the amount of manifold air
pressure in the engine.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator
(If Equipped)
E144524
It illuminates when you switch
the system on.
It illuminates white when the
system is in standby mode. It illuminates
green when you set the adaptive cruise
speed.
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 237).
Airbag Warning Lamp
E67017
If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, continues
to flash or remains on when the
engine is running, this indicates a
malfunction. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Automatic Headlamp High Beam
Indicator (If Equipped)
It illuminates when the system
turns the headlamp high beam
on.
Auto-Start-Stop Indicator
E146361
It illuminates when the engine
has automatically stopped. It
flashes to inform you when the
engine needs to restart. The
indicator is shown with a
strikethrough if the system is not
available.
See Auto-Start-Stop (page 179).
Battery
If it illuminates when driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Information System
Indicator (If Equipped)
E151262
It illuminates when you switch
the system off.
See Blind Spot Information
System (page 249).
110
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
Brake System Warning Lamp
WARNING: Driving your vehicle
with the warning lamp on is dangerous.
A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
E138644
It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when your vehicle is
moving, make sure the parking brake is
disengaged. If the parking brake is
disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cruise Control Indicator (If Equipped)
E71340
It illuminates when you switch
the system on.
See What Is Cruise Control
(page 236).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right direction
indicator or the hazard flashers.
Flashes during operation. An increase in
the rate of flashing warns of a failed
indicator bulb.
Door Ajar Warning Lamp
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Electric Park Brake
E146190
Illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 210).
Electronic Limited Slip Differential
(If Equipped)
E163170
Illuminated when using the
locking function of the electronic
limited slip differential.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when your vehicle
is moving, this indicates that the
engine is overheating. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
switch the engine off. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp
E71880
It illuminates and a chime
sounds until you fasten the
seatbelts.
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If
Equipped)
Note: Some indicators will appear different
depending on vehicle options.
E181778
Illuminates momentarily when
you select two-wheel drive high.
E181781
Illuminates when the automatic
four-wheel drive system is
engaged.
E181780
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive low is engaged.
E181779
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive high is engaged.
111
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
Front Fog Lamp Indicator
It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
Headlamp High Beam Indicator
It illuminates when you switch
the headlamp high beam on.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
Illuminates when hill descent is
switched on.
Hood Ajar
E246598
Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Liftgate Ajar Warning Lamp
E162453
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on and remains on if
the liftgate is open.
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp
Illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. If the oil level is sufficient,
this indicates a system malfunction. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
See Engine Oil Check (page 327).
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control
Illuminates when a powertrain
or a 4WD fault has been
detected. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
Increased exhaust gas temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter or other
vehicle components. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
immediately serviced. If it flashes, engine
misfire may be occurring.
It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.
112
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Catalytic Converter (page 190).
Stability Control and Traction
Control Indicator
E138639
Flashes during operation.
If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or remains
on when the engine is running, this
indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Note: The system automatically turns off
if there is a malfunction.
See Using Stability Control (page 215).
Stability Control and Traction
Control Off Warning Lamp
E130458
It illuminates when you switch
the system off.
Tow Haul Indicator
E246592
Illuminates when the tow/haul
feature has been activated. If the
light flashes steadily, have the
system serviced immediately, damage to
the transmission could occur.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Tone
Sounds when you leave the key in the
ignition and the driver door open.
Keyless Warning Alert
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key and
the keyless vehicle is in RUN, indicating the
vehicle is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Tone
Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is
not in the ignition) and the driver door is
open.
Parking Brake On Warning Tone
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
Direction Indicator Tone
Sounds when you leave the direction
indicator on when driving the vehicle more
than 1.5 mph (2.4 km/h).
113
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information appears in the
information display.
Note: Some menu items could appear
slightly different or not at all if the features
are optional.
Note: Trailer options are not available if
your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and you
programmed at least one MyKey.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
check in the box indicates the
feature is on, and unchecked indicates the
feature is off.
Information Display Controls (4
Inch Display)
• Press the up or down arrow buttons to
scroll through the list.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
4 Inch Display
Main Menu
Display Mode
Trip/Fuel
Towing
Off Road
Settings
114
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Display Mode
Distance to Empty
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Engine Information
Transmission Temp.
• Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before
running out of fuel.
• Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure in your specified unit.
• Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and oil temperature.
• Transmission Temp. - Shows the transmission temperature value.
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Enter the submenu and select your settingCompass
115
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Trip/Fuel
Average Speed
Auto StartStop
Trip 1 or 2
• Shows the time, distance traveled and average fuel economy of an individual journey.
Also shows the distance to empty.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph, average fuel
economy and distance to empty.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The system updates the graph
each minute with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Also shows the distance to empty.
Auto StartStop
• Shows the Auto StartStop status.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset values.
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Towing
Trailer StatusTrailer Status
Trailer Light Check
Trailer Sway ControlTrailer
Options
Enter the submenu and select your
setting
Select Trailer
Change Trailer Settings
Add Trailer
Connection Checklist
116
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Off Road
Off Road Status
Power Distribution
Off Road Status - Displays pitch, steering angle and roll.
Power Distribution - Displays a graphic of the power distribution between the front and
rear wheels.
Settings
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Blind Spot
Auto Engine OffVehicleAdvanced
Settings
Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting
Locks
Mirrors
Neutral Tow
Oil Life Reset
Power Liftgate
Remote Start
Windows
Wiper Controls
Enter the submenu and select
your setting
MyKey
UnitsDisplay Setup
117
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Settings
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
Information Display Controls (8
Inch Display) (If Equipped)
E219639
• Press the up or down arrow buttons to
scroll through the list.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
8 Inch Display
Main Menu
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Vehicle Info
118
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Main Menu
Towing
Off Road
Settings
MyView
Trip 1
Fuel Economy
Tire Pressure
Off Road Status
Enter the submenu for Trip,
Fuel, Tire pressure, and Off
Road selections
Add/Remove ScreensConfigure
MyView
Enter the submenu and
select your setting
Reorder Screens
• Trip 1 - Shows your trip timer, fuel used, trip odometer and average fuel economy.
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage and average fuel economy.
• Tire Pressure - Shows your car outline with tire pressure values.
• Off Road Status - Shows your pitch and roll screen.
Trip/Fuel
Enter the submenu for items such as trip timer,
distance to empty, odometer and avg fuel
economy
Trip 1
Enter the submenu for items such as trip timer,
distance to empty, odometer and avg fuel
economy
Trip 2
Enter the submenu and select your settingFuel Economy
Fuel History
Average Speed
Navigation/Compass
119
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Trip/Fuel
Compass
Auto StartStop
Trip 1 or 2
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
• Odo - Registers the distance of individual journeys.
• Avg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average
fuel economy.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The system updates the graph
each minute with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Navigation/Compass
• Navigation - Shows navigation turn by turn (Compass displayed when a route in
Navigation is not set).
Auto StartStop
• Shows the Auto StartStop status.
Vehicle Info
Gauge View
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Engine Information
120
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Vehicle Info
Transmission Temp
Seatbelts
• Gauge View - Allows you to select between either Turbo Boost or Transmission
Temp gauge.
• Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 368).
• Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and oil temperature.
• Transmission Temp - Shows the transmission temperature value.
• Seatbelts - Shows the seatbelt buckle status.
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Towing
% Grade, steering angle, gain and output displayTowing
Status
Trailer Name, Accumulated Distance, Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Status,
Trailer BLIS Status and Trailer Blind Spot
Trailer
Informa-
tion
Provides status of the brake, park and direction indicator light for the active
trailer.
Trailer
Light
Check
Trailer Sway ControlTrailer
Setup
Enter the submenu and select your
setting
Select trailer
Change Trailer Settings
Add Trailer
Connection Checklist
121
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Off Road
Off Road Status
Power Distribution
Off Road Status - Displays pitch, steering angle and roll.
Power Distribution - Displays a graphic of the power distribution between the front and
rear wheels.
Settings
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Alert
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Blind Spot
Enter the submenu for items such as alert sensitivity, distance indication
and active braking
Pre-Collision
Enter the submenu and select your settingCruise
Control
Enter the submenu for items such as system modes and alert intensityLane
Keeping
System
Auto Engine OffVehicleAdvanced
Settings
Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting
Locks
Mirrors
Neutral Tow
Oil Life Reset
Alarm
Power Liftgate
Power Running Boards
122
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Settings
Remote Start
Windows
Wiper Controls
Enter the submenu and select
your setting
MyKey
UnitsDisplay Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
E184451
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. The information
display will automatically remove other
messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Active Park Fault
123
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
237).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-
tion properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
237).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
237).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
The system has disabled the automatic braking.Normal Cruise Active
Adaptive Braking Off
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Front Sensor Not Aligned
The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac Off
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
AdvanceTrac On
124
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched
it on.
AdvanceTrac SPORT
MODE
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off. See Using Traction Control (page 213).
Traction Control Off
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on. See Using Traction Control (page 213).
Traction Control On
Airbag
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a
blocked sensor.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm and Security
ActionMessage
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 83).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off In
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on
the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
125
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system detects an extended low-
voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save
Battery
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-
tion System (page 249).
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 249).
Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 249).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
126
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The system automatically turns off and displays this message
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 249).
Cross Traffic Alert Deac-
tivated Trailer Attached
The system automatically turns off and displays this message
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 249).
Blind Spot Alert Deactiv-
ated Trailer Attached
Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or goose-
neck, or when the trailer width is wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or
longer than 33 ft (10 m).
Trailer Blind Spot Not
available Due to Invalid
Trailer
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door(s) listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested
127
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Drivetrain
ActionMessage
Displays if the electronic limited slip differential system
encounters a hardware failure. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Check Electronic Limited
Slip Differential
Displays if an electronic limited slip differential system fault
is present. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Off See
Owner's Manual
Displays when the electronic limited slip differential system
resumes normal function.
Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Restored to
Normal
Displays if the electronic limited slip differential system
temporarily turns off due to overheating or an undersized
spare tire. If an undersized spare tire is installed, replace the
spare tire with a full-sized tire as soon as possible. If not, stop
the vehicle in a safe location and allow the system to cool.
Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Temporarily
Disabled
Displays if the electronic limited slip differential has limited
functionality. This could be due to an undersized spare tire
or caused by the system overheating. If an undersized spare
tire is installed, replace the spare tire with a full-sized tire as
soon as possible. If an undersized spare tire is not installed,
the vehicle has reduced functionality. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Reduced
Torque
Displays when you select a drive mode that does not allow
the electronic limited slip differential to turn on. This may
also display when the electronic limited slip differential has
a fault and the vehicle requests the locking feature.
Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Locking
Feature Not Available
The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is safe to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Enabled
Leave Transmission in
Neutral
The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled
128
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Engine
ActionMessage
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high
engine temperature.
Power Reduced to Lower Engine
Temp
Four-Wheel Drive
ActionMessage
A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Check 4x4
The 4X4 system is making a shift.4x4 Shift in Progress
Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and
you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and
your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW
and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW
and your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
May display when there is a transfer case gear tooth
blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral
state.
Shift Delayed Pull Forward
Displays when the system turns off the clutch due to
excessive stress. The system automatically turns on
the clutch after it cools.
4x4 Temporarily Disabled
Displays when the 4X4 system has been restored to
its original setting.
4x4 Restored
Displays when the 4X4 system temporarily turns on
4H from 4A after detecting driving conditions that
require greater 4X4 performance. The system automat-
ically returns to 4A after the system no longer detects
these driving conditions.
4x4 Temporarily Locked
129
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.To START Press Brake
The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 173).
No Key Detected
You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine
and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Full Accessory Power
Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Successful
You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.
Key Program Failure
You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
system.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough Keys
Learned
Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine
is on.
Engine ON
130
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires you to
clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left is at 0%.Oil Change Required
The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system
immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 334).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. See an author-
ized dealer.
Transport / Factory
Mode Contact Dealer
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
131
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
You did not program a MyKey.MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed Drive
Safely
Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
Off Road
ActionMessage
Hill descent control mode is active.Hill Descent Control Active
Hill descent control mode is inactive.Hill Descent Control OFF
Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode
entry has not been met.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
XX MPH/km/h or Less
You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.
For Hill Descent Select Gear
132
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must
resume control.
Hill Descent Driver Resume
Control
A hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control Fault
The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.Hill Descent Control Off System
Cooling
The hill descent control system is ready.Hill Descent Control Ready
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Front Parking Aid (page
220).
Check Front Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
219).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Displays if the front park aid sensor is blocked.Front Park Aid Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displays if the rear park aid sensor is blocked.Rear Park Aid Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displays if the park aid sensor is blocked.Park Aid Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
133
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Park Brake
ActionMessage
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake
and Switch
The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is
attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Park Brake Use Switch
to Release
The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.
Release Park Brake
The electric park brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric park brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
The electric park brake system has been put into a special
mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Maintenance
Mode
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction
Service Now
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
The steering lock system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Lock Malfunc-
tion Service Now
134
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Pre-Collision Assist
ActionMessage
You have a blocked sensor due to bad
weather, ice, mud or water in front of the
radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor
Blocked
A fault with the system has occurred.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
ActionMessage
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ can only be activated when
the vehicle is stopped.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Not
Active Stop Vehicle to Activate
Camera System is locating the sticker. Wait until the
sticker is found before attempting to use Pro Trailer
Backup Assist.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Locating Sticker Please wait...
Press Knob to Exit
Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ has reached
max trailer angle.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop
now Maximum trailer angle
Press Knob to Exit
Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ is no longer
controlling steering.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop
Now Take Control of Steering
Wheel
Slow vehicle speed. Vehicle is approaching the exit
speed for the Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ feature.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Reduce Speed Turn Knob to
Steer Press Knob to Exit
Conditions for Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ operation
are not met. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 276).
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
System is Not Available
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ cannot operate with hands
on wheel. Remove hands to activate.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Remove Hands from Steering
Wheel to Activate Press Knob
to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ knob has been pushed to
deactivate the system.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Cancelled by Driver Take
Control of Steering Wheel
135
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation is only available in
reverse gear. Shift gear selector into reverse to activate.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Shift
to Reverse to Activate. Press
Knob to Exit
Camera system cannot locate sticker. Shift to park.Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Sticker Not Found Shift to Park
Press Knob to Exit
Camera system cannot locate sticker. See Trailer
Reversing Aids (page 276).
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Sticker Not Found Refer to
Owner's Manual. Press Knob to
Exit
Drive between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h) straight
forward to calibrate Pro Trailer Backup Assist™.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Drive Straight Forward to Calib-
rate. Press Knob to Exit
The system has completed calibration. Stop the
vehicle to use Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ feature.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Calibration Complete Stop
Vehicle
Remote Start
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button
Seats
ActionMessage
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not
Permitted While Driving
Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory {0} Saved
136
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
Starting System
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .To START Press Brake
The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.
Cranking Time Exceeded
The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 368).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 368).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 368). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Trailer
ActionMessage
The current gain setting for the trailer brake.Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0}
The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a
trailer is not connected.
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0} No Trailer
Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a
Trailer (page 275).
Trailer Brake Module Fault
A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given
ignition cycle.
Trailer Connected
137
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
ActionMessage
A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 275).
Trailer Wiring Fault
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
a Trailer (page 275).
Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual
There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Towing a Trailer (page 275).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault
See Manual
One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified
tire pressure.
Trailer Tire Low Specified:
A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized dealer.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
Capability Not Detected
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.
See General Information (page 114).
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication
Not Setup See Manual
Transmission
ActionMessage
A reminder to shift into park.Transmission Not in Park
138
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
(IF EQUIPPED)
E293089
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Directing the Airflow
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the windshield
air vents and de-mister.
E244097
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the instrument
panel air vents.
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the footwell air
vents.
You can direct air through any combination
of these air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
E265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of
air circulated in the vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
E265862
Turn the control to set the temperature.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
Press and release the button.
139
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Use air conditioning with recirculated air
to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example,
maximum defrost) the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On
and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching Maximum Air
Conditioning On and Off
Turn the temperature control
counterclockwise to the lowest
setting for maximum cooling.
Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to
the highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Turn the temperature control
clockwise to the highest setting
for maximum defrosting.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
Note: Depending on your region, air
conditioning turns on.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns
on when you select maximum defrost.
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may
reduce the time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Locking the Rear Climate Control
E266664
Press and release the button.
When illuminated, you can only operate
the rear passenger settings through the
front controls.
Setting the Rear Blower Motor
Speed
Press and release + or - to adjust
the volume of air circulated in
the rear passenger
compartment.
Setting the Rear Temperature
E265400
Press and release + or - to set
the temperature in the rear
passenger compartment.
Switching the Rear Climate
Control On and Off
Press and release the button.
140
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
E293315
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls could look different
from what you see here.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
some of the climate features.
Accessing Rear Climate Controls
E270447
Press and release the button to
access additional controls for
the rear climate system. See
Climate Control (page 139).
Directing the Airflow
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the windshield
air vents and de-mister.
E244097
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the instrument
panel air vents.
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the footwell air
vents.
You can direct air through any combination
of these air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Press and release + or - to adjust
the volume of air circulated in
the vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
E265862
Turn the control on the left-hand side of
the climate control to set the left-hand
temperature.
Note: This control also sets the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Turn the control on the right-hand side of
the climate control to set the right-hand
temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch on automatic operation.
Repeatedly press the button to
adjust auto mode.
The system adjusts the blower motor
speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air
to reach and maintain the temperature you
have set.
Note: The system starts at the previous
setting when you switch on AUTO mode.
141
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Auto Mode Indicator Status
DescriptionAuto Mode Indicator
Status
One indicator illumin-
ated.
• The blower motor speed is reduced.
• Use this setting to minimize the amount of noise from
the blower motor.
• This setting increases the time taken to cool the
interior.
Two indicators illumin-
ated.
• The blower motor speed is moderate.
Three indicators illumin-
ated.
• The blower motor speed is increased.
• Use this setting to reduce the time taken to cool the
interior.
• This setting increases the amount of noise from the
blower motor.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
Press and release the button.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air
to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, such as
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor could continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On
and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off
E265280
Press and release the button to
switch the temperature control
for the right-hand side of the
vehicle on and off.
You can also switch off dual
zone mode by pressing and
holding the button for more than
two seconds.
Switching Maximum Air
Conditioning On and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum cooling.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set
to LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to
the highest speed.
142
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum defrosting.
The left-hand and right-hand
temperatures are set to HI, air flows
through the windshield air vents, and the
blower motor adjusts to the highest speed.
Note: Depending on your region, air
conditioning turns on.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns
on when you select maximum defrost.
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This could
reduce the time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air could turn off, or
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation could also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Switching the Heated Seats On
and Off (If Equipped)
See Seats (page 150).
Switching the Ventilated Seats On
and Off (If Equipped)
E268558
See Seats (page 150).
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE -
VEHICLES WITH: AUTOMATIC
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. Automatic mode is best
recommended to maintain set temperature.
Note: The system adjusts to heat or cool
the interior to the temperature you select
as quickly as possible.
143
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Note: For the system to function efficiently,
the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
outside temperatures, the system directs
air flow to the windshield and side window
air vents. In addition, the blower motor may
run at a slower speed until the engine warms
up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system uses recirculated air to
maximize interior cooling. Blower motor
speed may also reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Press and release MAX A/C.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1. Press and release defrost or maximum
defrost.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE -
VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
highest speed setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
144
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
center setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
3. Direct air to the footwell air vents.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Select MAX A/C.
2. Drive with the windows open for a short
period of time.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
center setting.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
3. Direct air to the instrument panel air
vents.
Vehicle Stationary for Extended
Periods During Extreme High
Ambient Temperatures
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Place your vehicle in park (P) or
neutral.
3. Select MAX A/C.
4. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
lowest speed setting.
Defogging the Side Windows in
Cold Weather
1. Direct air to the instrument panel and
windshield air vents.
2. Press and release A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer.
4. Adjust the blower motor speed to the
highest setting.
5. Direct air toward the side windows.
6. Close the instrument panel air vents.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE
CONTROLS - VEHICLES WITH:
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
E293083
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Directing Air to the Overhead Air
Vents
E244097
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the overhead air
vents.
Directing Air to the Rear Footwell
Air Vents
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to rear footwell air
vents.
Rear Climate Control Lock
Indicator
When illuminated, you can only
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front
controls.
145
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Setting the Rear Blower Motor
Speed
E265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of
air circulated in the rear passenger
compartment.
Setting the Rear Temperature
E265862
Turn the control to set the temperature in
the rear passenger compartment.
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and
Off
Press and release the button to
switch on rear automatic
operation, then set the
temperature.
Switching the Rear Climate
Control On and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching the Rear Heated Seats
On and Off
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE
CONTROLS - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
E289989
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Directing Air to the Overhead Air
Vents
E244097
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to the overhead air
vents.
146
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Directing Air to the Rear Footwell
Air Vents
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to rear footwell air
vents.
Rear Climate Control Lock
Indicator
When illuminated, you can only
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front
controls.
Setting the Rear Blower Motor
Speed
E265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of
air circulated in the rear passenger
compartment.
Setting the Rear Temperature
E265862
Turn the control to set the temperature in
the rear passenger compartment.
Switching the Rear Climate
Control On and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching the Rear Heated Seats
On and Off (If Equipped)
See Climate Controlled Seats
(page 163).
HEATED WINDSHIELD (IF
EQUIPPED)
Windshield Wiper De-Icer
The windshield wiper de-icer turns on in
low temperatures.
147
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
HEATED REAR WINDOW
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Make sure the engine is on before
operating the heated windows.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window. The vehicle warranty may not
cover damage to the heated rear window
grid lines.
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused to the mirror housing or glass.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 475).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED)
You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the information
display controls. See Information
Displays (page 114).
The climate control system adjusts the
interior temperature during remote start.
You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
Switch the ignition on to make
adjustments.
Based on your remote start settings, the
following vehicle-dependent features may
or may not remain on after remote starting
your vehicle:
• Climate controlled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
• Windshield wiper de-icer.
Note: For dual zone climate controlled
seats, the passenger seat setting defaults
to match the driver seat during remote start.
Automatic Settings
If Auto is on, the system sets the interior
temperature to 72°F (22°C) and heats or
cools the vehicle interior as required to
achieve comfort.
148
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
Note: In cold weather, the heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.
Last Settings
If Last Settings is on, the system uses the
settings last selected before you turned
off the vehicle.
Heated and Cooled Features
In Auto mode, certain heated features may
switch on during cold weather, and cooled
features during hot weather.
149
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat
backrest too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in personal injury in the event
of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop or crash.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30 degrees
from the upright position.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
150
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Failure to adjust the head restraint
properly could reduce its effectiveness
during certain impacts.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front Seat Manual Head
Restraints
E138642
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing foam and
structure.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Note: You cannot remove front seat head
restraints that have entertainment system
video screens.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Tilting Manual Head Restraints (If
Equipped)
The front seat head restraints tilt for extra
comfort.
E144727
151
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
Second Row Outermost Head
Restraints
The outermost head restraints are
non-adjustable, but you may be able to
fold them rearward.
E257663
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing foam and
structure.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
A fold button (If equipped).D
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold both C buttons.
2. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Note: Make sure the head restraint fold
button is facing the outermost side of the
seat.
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press button D to fold the head
restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place it
back to the upright position.
Second Row Center Seat Head
Restraint
E138645
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing foam and
structure.
A
Two steel stems.B
152
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Third Row Head Restraints
The third row head restraints are
non-adjustable, but you may be able to
fold them.
E193964
The head restraints consist of:
• A trimmed energy absorbing foam and
structure.
• A fold button (If equipped).
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press the button to fold the head
restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place it
back in the upright position.
Power Rear Head Restraints (If
Equipped)
The third row outermost head restraints
are fixed and cannot be removed.
E272543
Press the button on the head restraint or
the button on the instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel to fold the third
row outermost head restraints. Pull the
head restraint up to place it in the upright
position.
Note: These head restraints fold when you
press the fold flat button.
153
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
MANUAL SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully
locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward. Not securing the seat into
the locked position can be dangerous in
a crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
E175314
Recline Adjustment (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
E175315
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
E205042
The lumbar support control is on the
outboard side of the seat. Turn the control
to adjust your support.
POWER SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
154
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
E176038
Adjusting the Lumbar Support
E176039
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front
Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. When the seat backrest and
cushion are both active, the massage
alternates between zones.
155
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
E156301
Lumbar and Bolster ModeMassage Mode
Upper lumbarBack massage intensity
adjustment
A
Lumbar decreaseMassage intensity decrease
and off
*
B
Lower lumbar
**
Cushion massage intensity
adjustment
C
Lumbar increaseMassage intensity increaseD
-On and offE
*
The massage feature defaults to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature defaults to the middle
lumbar mode.
**
Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function.
To access and make adjustments to the
lumbar setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
> Multi-Contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-Contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Low or High.
156
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants
are clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power adjustable foot pedals.
• Optional power adjustable steering
column.
The memory control is on the driver door.
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or if the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N)
and the vehicle is not moving when the
ignition is on.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked
to a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control (or any memory button)
during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to three remote controls
or intelligent access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
157
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to recall a memory position.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat position rearward up to 2 in (5 cm)
when you switch the ignition off.
The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display. See
General Information (page 114).
REAR SEATS
Folding the Second Row
Outermost Seats
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
E246710
1. Locate the handle on the side of the
seat cushion by the door.
2. Pull up on the handle to fold the seat
backrest.
Note: Use caution when folding the seat
backrest to the flat position as the seat
moves forward when you lift the release
handle.
To return the seat to the upright position:
E246709
1. Lift the seat backrest toward the rear
of the vehicle.
2. Rotate the seat backrest until you hear
a click, locking it in the upright position.
158
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
Adjusting the Manual Second Row
Outermost Seats for Easy Entry
WARNING: Do not drive your
vehicle with a seat that is unlatched or
in the folded position. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death in the event of a sudden
stop or crash.
WARNING: Check under the seat
cushion to make sure no cargo or objects
are under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase
the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
Note: You can move the outermost seats
forward to allow access to the third row
seats.
This feature allows for easier entry and exit
to and from the third row seat.
E257686
1. Pull the lever up.
2. Tilt the entire seat forward.
3. Slide the seat forward until it stops.
4. To return the seat to the seating
position, slide the seat rearward while
pulling down on the seat backrest until
the latch fully engages.
5. To move the seat further back, pull the
lever under the front of the seat and
slide it backward.
Note: You must move the seat to the full
forward position before you move it
rearward. Otherwise, the seat may not slide
properly rearward.
Note: You can slide the outermost seats
forward when using a child restraint.
159
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
Adjusting the Second Row
Outermost Seats for Easy Exit
E246708
When exiting your vehicle from the third
row seats, pull the lever up on the upper
corner of the outermost seats. Then, push
the seat forward until it stops.
Reclining the Second Row
Outermost Seat Backrest
WARNING: Reclining the seatback
can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat's seatbelt, resulting in severe
personal injuries in the event of a crash.
E247681
The release handle is on the outermost
side of the seat cushion. Lift it to adjust the
seat backrest to your desired position.
Folding the Second Row Center
Seat (If Equipped)
WARNING: To prevent possible
damage to the seat or seatbelts, make
sure that the seatbelts are not fastened
before folding the seatback.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
E247331
The release handle is in the upper right seat
backrest. Pull the handle to release the
folding seat latch.
To return the seat to the upright position,
rotate the seat backrest until you hear a
click, locking it in the upright position.
Note: Use the same release handle to
recline the seat backrest.
160
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
Adjusting the Second Row Center
Seat (If Equipped)
Note: Move this seat forward to keep a
child in a child restraint close to the front
seat occupants. Move the seat to the full
rearward position when it is occupied by
older children or adults, including children
in booster seats.
E247034
Lift the handle to move the seat forward
or backward.
Folding the Power Rear Seats (If
Equipped)
Note: The power fold seats operate for 10
minutes after you switch the ignition off.
The transmission must be in park (P) and
the liftgate, or liftgate glass must be open.
Similar to the battery saver feature, the
power rear seat disable 10 minutes after you
switch the ignition off.
Note: Be sure the third-row center head
restraint is in the lowered position before
you power the rear seats down. The
third-row outermost head restraints fold
automatically when you press the fold
button.
The control buttons are on the left-hand
rear quarter trim panel (accessible from
the liftgate area).
With Second Row Bench Seats
E257920
With Second Row Captain Chairs
E246705
Folds the left-hand third-row
seat.
A
Folds both third-row seats.B
161
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
Folds the right-hand third-row
seat.
C
Folds the left-hand second-row
seat.
D
Folds the second-row bench
center seat or both second-row
captain chair seats.
E
Folds the right-hand second-row
seat.
F
To return the second-row seat backrest to
the original position, rotate the seat
backrest up until it latches in the upright
position. The seat backrest clicks when it
is locked into position.
To return the third-row seat backrest to
the original position, press the
corresponding control again.
Note: If the third row seat does not
completely fold or unfold, press and hold
the seat button until the seat folds and
unfolds twice.
If the power rear seat is disabled after 10
minutes, you can enable the seat by:
• Opening any door.
• Pressing the unlock button on the key
fob.
• Pressing any keyless entry keypad
button.
• Switching the ignition on.
Folding Down the Rear Seats to the
Load Floor
WARNING: To prevent possible
damage to the seat or seatbelts, make
sure that the seatbelts are not fastened
before folding the seatback.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
The third-row seats have obstacle
detection that prevents the seats from
folding or returning if they are obstructed.
Reclining the Third Row Power Seats
WARNING: Do not recline a rear
seat on which a child restraint is
installed. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
child restraint.
The third-row power recline buttons are
on the quarter trim panel on each side of
the vehicle.
E246706
Moves the seat backrest
rearward.
A
Moves the seat backrest
forward.
B
162
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Seats
WARNING: Use caution when using
the heated seat if you are unable to feel
pain to your skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions.
The heated seat could cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp
objects into the seat cushion or seat
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place anything
on the seat that blocks the heat, for
example a seat cover or a cushion. This
could cause the seat to overheat. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
Note: The heated seats switch on during a
remote start if they are enabled. See
Remote Start (page 148).
Note: The heated seats may also switch
on when you start your vehicle if they were
on when you previously switched your
vehicle off.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
E146322
Press this symbol to cycle through the
various heat settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate warmer settings.
Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
The rear heated seat controls are on the
rear of the center console.
Automatic Climate Controlled
Seats (If Equipped)
When you switch the auto setting on, the
climate controlled seats switch between
the heated seats and ventilated seats to
match your climate control setting.
Ventilated Seats
Note: The ventilated seats switch on during
a remote start if they are enabled. See
Remote Start (page 148).
Note: The ventilated seats may also switch
on when you start your vehicle if they were
on when you previously switched your
vehicle off.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
• Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.
The ventilated seats only function when
the engine is running.
163
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
E224689
Press this symbol to cycle through the
various ventilation settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the ventilated seats are on, the feature
turns itself off. You need to reactivate it.
Automatic Climate Controlled
Seats (If Equipped)
When you switch the auto setting on, the
climate controlled seats switch between
the heated seats and ventilated seats to
match your climate control setting.
164
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Seats
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does
not have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any
garage door opener manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
E188211
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This allows for quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
165
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press
and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
166
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E188213
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator light above the buttons
flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
codes for all buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
167
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
168
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar
lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result
in fire or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
Note: If the power supply does not work
after you switch the ignition off, switch the
ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
USB Port and Power Point
Locations
USB Ports and Power Points may be in the
following locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the front of the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.
• On the passenger side floor panel.
• 3rd row on the quarter trim panels.
Note: Some of the USB ports may not have
data transfer capabilities.
Note: Incorrect use of the USB ports can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due
to powering multiple devices that can
reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and
could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point turns off when you
switch off the ignition, when the vehicle is
not in accessory mode or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
169
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Auxiliary Power Points
E247586
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is ON or the vehicle is in
accessory mode.
• Off: The power point is OFF, the ignition
is OFF or the vehicle is not in accessory
mode.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
Due to the different technologies used on
its construction, some devices may exceed
the capacity shown on its label when they
are initially plugged-in.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
WIRELESS ACCESSORY
CHARGER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Wireless charging
devices can affect the operation of
implanted medical devices, including
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we
recommend that you consult with your
physician.
Tests on this equipment show that it
complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules.
• This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and
may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. There is no
guarantee that the interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television
reception, please consult the dealer.
• This product is not end-user
serviceable.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
170
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Auxiliary Power Points
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Note: Devices without built-in Qi wireless
charging receivers require an additional Qi
receiver or sleeve.
Note: For compatible devices with built-in
Qi wireless charging capability, the charging
performance may be affected if your device
is in a case. It may be necessary to remove
the case to wirelessly charge your device.
The system supports one Qi wireless
charging compatible device on the
charging area.
Keep the charging area clean and remove
foreign objects prior to charging a device.
Do not place items with a magnetic strip,
for example passports, parking tickets or
credit cards, near the charging area when
charging a device. Damage may occur to
the magnetic strip.
Do not place metal objects, for example
remote controls, coins and candy
wrappers, on or near the charging area
when charging a device. Metal objects may
heat up and degrade the charging
performance.
Note: The device controls the rate of
charge, or charging power. During charging,
the device and the charger may heat up, this
is normal. If the battery gets hotter than
usual, the charger may stop charging.
E297549
The charging area is on the
center console or lower
instrument panel. See Center
Console (page 172).
You can charge a device if the vehicle is
on, when in accessory mode, or anytime
SYNC is on.
To begin charging, place the device on the
center of the charging surface with the
charging side down. The charging stops
after your device reaches a full charge.
Note: If the system detects a foreign object
or if the device is misaligned on the charging
area, a message appears in the display.
Note: Software and firmware updates may
affect device compatibility, including the
use of unofficial software or firmware. You
should verify charging functionality with your
specific devices when in your vehicle.
DescriptionBehaviorMessage
This message appears when
wireless charging begins.
Message on screen display
or pop-up window.
Wireless Charger Active
The system stops charging
your device if the system
detects the phone is
misaligned, or a foreign
metal object is on the char-
ging surface.
Pop-up window.
Charging Terminated
Phone misaligned or object
between phone and charger
detected. Correct the condi-
tion to resume charging.
171
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E248043
Front storage compartment with
wireless charging port, and USB
ports.
A
Cup holders.B
Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point.
C
Rear cup holders.D
Rear audio controls.E
AC power point.F
Auxiliary power point.G
Rear climate controls.H
Rear storage compartment.I
USB ports.J
Switch pack.K
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E266392
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
172
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic.
Always open the garage door before you
start the engine.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You
can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH
E252522
0
/
/
/
/
/
/
0 (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
III (start) - Cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.
173
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: A valid passive key must be located
inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Ignition Modes
E144447
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but your
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button twice.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. You
cannot attempt to start the engine for at
least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are
limited to a 15-second engine cranking time.
You need to wait 60 minutes before you can
crank the engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
• Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with
a keyless ignition, see the following
instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
174
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
E256153
1. Access the backup slot.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch.
After 20 seconds, you can no longer start
your vehicle if it does not detect a valid
passive key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
automatically shuts down your vehicle if
it has been idling for an extended period.
The ignition also turns off to save battery
power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a
message appears in the information
175
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
display showing a timer counting down. If
you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
your vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as normal.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 114). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the
feature off for the current ignition cycle
only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shuts
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the
engine when your vehicle is still moving
results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is
required to apply the brakes and to stop
your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The
steering does not lock, but higher effort
could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
restart the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
176
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block
heater. This could damage the power
cable and may cause an electrical short
resulting in fire, injury and property
damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element, installed in the engine block and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• If the block heater cord is under the
hood, Do Not remove the wiring from
its original location. Do Not close the
hood on the extension wiring.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
177
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
178
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically stopping and restarting
the engine when your vehicle has stopped.
The engine restarts automatically when
you release the brake pedal.
In some situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
• To maintain interior comfort.
• To recharge the battery.
Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine is off.
Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable,
Auto-Start-Stop will be inhibited for a short
time after a refuel event while the system
is verifying the fuel type being used.
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake. Make sure you shift into
park (P) for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
WARNING: Before opening the
hood or performing any maintenance,
fully apply the parking brake, shift into
park (P) or neutral (N) and switch the
ignition off.
WARNING: Always switch the
ignition off before leaving the vehicle. If
the ignition is switched on an automatic
restart may occur at any time.
WARNING: The system may
require the engine to automatically
restart when the auto-start-stop
indicator illuminates green or flashes
amber. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
The Auto-Start-Stop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
114).
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop
The system automatically enables every
time you start your vehicle if:
• You do not press the Auto-Start-Stop
button (not illuminated).
• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) after you have
initially started your vehicle.
• You have stopped your vehicle.
• Your foot is on the brake pedal.
• The driver door is closed.
• There is adequate brake vacuum.
• The interior compartment has cooled
or warmed to an acceptable level.
• The front windshield defroster is off.
• You have not turned the steering wheel
rapidly or you do not have it at a sharp
angle.
• The vehicle is not on a steep road
grade.
• The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
• The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
• Elevation is below about 11,000 ft
(3,350 m).
• Ambient temperature is moderate.
• The trailer is not connected.
• If you select Normal, Eco, Snow/Wet
or Grass/Gravel/Snow modes.
• You are not in 4H or 4L.
• You have not selected Manual shift
mode.
179
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Unique Driving Characteristics
• Hill descent control is not active.
• You have not selected Tow haul, Sport,
Sand or Mud/Rut modes.
Note: Note when in Sport mode it can be
enabled by pressing the Auto-Start-Stop
button.
The green Auto-Start-Stop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
E146361
If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light,
it illuminates when automatic engine stop
is not available due to one of the above
noted conditions not being met.
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have removed your foot from the
brake pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
• You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
• The driver safety belt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
• Your vehicle is moving.
• The interior compartment does not
meet customer comfort when air
conditioning or heat is on.
• Fogging of the windows could occur
and the air conditioning is on.
• The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
• You have exceeded the maximum
engine off time.
• When you press the Auto-Start-Stop
button with the engine automatically
stopped.
• The front defroster is turned to the Max
setting.
• When you shift into park (P), the engine
will restart.
Any of the following conditions may result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• You have increased the blower fan
speed or changed the climate control
temperature.
• You have an electrical accessory
turned on or plugged in.
Note: You may notice that the climate seat
fan fluctuates during an automatic restart.
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop
E181352
Press the Auto-Start-Stop button on the
center console to switch the system off.
The button will illuminate. Deactivating
using the button lasts only 1 key cycle.
Press the button again to restore
Auto-Start-Stop function.
Note: If the Shift to park (P), Restart Engine
message appears and the amber
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light flashes, this
indicates automatic restart is unavailable.
You must restart the vehicle manually. See
Information Displays (page 114).
180
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Unique Driving Characteristics
If your vehicle is in an engine off
Auto-Start-Stop, shifting from drive (D) to
reverse (R) will not cause a restart if you
do not press the brake pedal. The message
Auto-Start-Stop Press Brake to Start
Engine appears. You must press the brake
pedal within 60 seconds or the system
requires you to shift into park (P) and
manually restart your vehicle.
181
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
182
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 275).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage
compartment floor covering.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
183
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket
funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open
or push open the capless fuel system
with foreign objects. This could damage
the fuel system and its seal and cause
injury to you or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 183).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
184
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING
Refueling System Overview
E267248
B
C
A
Fuel filler door.A
Fuel tank filler valve.B
Fuel tank filler pipe.C
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
E206911
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
A
Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center
rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release.
B
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
C
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
D
Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
185
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the
fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when
the fuel pump nozzle automatically
shuts off for the first time. Failure to
follow this will fill the expansion space
in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
E139202
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel
tank filler pipe.
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
186
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
E206912
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E119081
6. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly
remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
close, a message could appear in the
information display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page
183). This action should dislodge any
debris that may be preventing the fuel
tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 380).
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: When refueling your vehicle after the
fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity due to the empty
reserve still present in the fuel tank.
187
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
Filling the Fuel Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See Information Displays
(page 114).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
1. Completely fill the fuel tank and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving, for example city
or highway. This provides an accurate
estimate of your vehicle’s fuel economy
under current driving conditions. Keeping
records during summer and winter shows
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
Conditions
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces
fuel economy.
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Avoid adding accessories that increase
aerodynamic drag to your vehicle such
as bug deflectors, car top carriers and
ski or bike racks.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
188
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the
vehicle from the engine and exhaust
system heat and noise. On vehicles with
no original equipment floor covering
insulation, do not carry passengers in a
manner that permits prolonged skin
contact with the metal floor. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in
fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
189
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is
very high. Never work around or attempt
to repair any part of the exhaust system
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short
period of engine operation and stays hot
after the engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 304).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
190
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’ s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 185).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
191
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
192
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Engine Emission Control
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift
into park (P). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, death or property
damage.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
Understanding the Shift Positions
of Your Automatic Transmission
Console Shifter
E252861
Column Shifter (If Equipped)
E249567
Note: You can press the button on the
gearshift lever to cycle through the available
drive modes. See Drive Control (page 261).
Putting Your Vehicle In or Out of Gear:
1. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
2. Move the transmission selector to the
desired gear.
193
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Transmission
3. When you finish driving, come to a
complete stop.
4. Move the transmission selector to park
(P).
The instrument cluster displays the current
gear.
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your
vehicle locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning. Always
come to a complete stop before putting
your vehicle into and out of park (P).
On a console shifter, when you switch the
ignition off, your vehicle shifts into park (P).
If you switch the ignition off when the
vehicle is moving, it first shifts into neutral
(N) until it comes to a complete stop. Your
vehicle then shifts into park (P)
automatically.
The electric parking brake may apply when
you shift to park (P) without the brake
pedal fully pressed. The electric parking
brake applies when you shift to park (P)
on large slopes. The electric parking brake
releases with the drive away release
function or manually as described in the
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake
section. See Electric Parking Brake
(page 210).
Automatic Return to Park - Console
Shifter
Note: This feature does not operate when
your vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or
neutral tow.
Your vehicle has a feature that shifts into
park (P) when any of the following
conditions occur:
• You turn the vehicle off.
• You open the driver door with your
seatbelt unlatched and the vehicle
stopped.
• You unlatch your seatbelt when the
driver door is open and the vehicle
stopped.
If you turn your vehicle off when moving,
your vehicle first shifts into neutral (N) until
it comes to a complete stop and then shift
into park (P) automatically.
Note: If you have waited an extended
period of time, 2-15 minutes before starting
your vehicle, unlatching your seatbelt can
cause this feature to turn on, even with the
driver door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly
if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If
your door ajar indicator does not illuminate
when you open the driver door or the
indicator illuminates with the driver door
closed, see your authorized dealer.
Reverse (R)
With the selector in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the selector in neutral (N), you can
start your vehicle and it is free to roll. Hold
the brake pedal down when in this position.
194
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Transmission
Stay in Neutral Mode - Console Shifter
This mode allows your vehicle to stay in
neutral when you exit your vehicle.
Extended usage of Stay in Neutral mode
could result in a battery voltage reduction
to a level where the vehicle may no longer
start. Keep your vehicle stationary to enter
this mode.
Note: Stay in Neutral mode is a temporary
vehicle state with the ignition off. Once in
this mode, maintain sufficient battery
voltage or your vehicle returns to park. Do
not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in
Neutral mode if you want your vehicle to
stay in neutral when you exit or switch off
your vehicle.
Note: Do not use this feature for towing
your vehicle.
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
always fully apply the parking brake prior
to doing this procedure. Use wheels
chocks if appropriate.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
• Move the transmission selector to
neutral (N).
• A message appears in your information
display screen prompting you to press
the manual (M) button.
• Press the manual (M) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.
• You can complete this step as long
as the message prompts you to
remain in neutral (N).
• A confirmation message appears
in the information display when
your vehicle has entered Stay in
Neutral mode.
To exit Stay in Neutral mode, apply the
brake and select a different gear. See
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear for
more information.
Stay in Neutral Mode - Console Shifter -
No Start
Use this feature to move your transmission
from the park (P) position in the event of
a no start situation. If your vehicle has a
dead battery, it requires an external power
source. Do not tow your vehicle in this
mode.
Note: This feature only functions if your 12
volt battery has power and the starter can
spin the engine. If vehicle battery voltage is
not sufficient, it could need an external 12
volt power source, for example, jumper
cables, battery charger or jump pack, for this
feature to function.
Note: Once in this mode, maintain sufficient
battery voltage or your vehicle returns to
park.
195
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Transmission
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
always fully apply the parking brake prior
to doing this procedure. Use wheels
chocks if appropriate.
1. Do not press the brake pedal. Press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
Keep the brakes applied through step
6.
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor
and hold through step 6.
4. Rotate transmission selector to Neutral
(N) and press the manual (M) button.
5. Press and release the push to start
button, the transmission needs a
minimum of 2 seconds to exit park.
6. When neutral (N) displays, you can
release the brake and accelerator
pedals.
To exit Stay in Neutral mode, select a
different gear.
A message appears in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through ten.
Manual (M)
With the transmission selector in manual
(M) or by placing the shifter column into
the manual position, you can change gears
up or down as preferred. By pushing the
manual (M) button, you have control of
selecting the gear you desire using the +
and - buttons on the transmission selector.
Tow/Haul Mode
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle.
E246592
With Column Shifter
To activate tow haul for the
column shifter, press the button
on the gearshift lever to cycle through the
available drive modes until you can select
tow haul mode. See Drive Control (page
261). The tow haul indicator light
illuminates in the instrument cluster when
the system is active.
With Console Shifter
To activate tow haul, press the drive
modes button or rotate the dial, to cycle
through the available drive modes until you
can select tow haul mode. See Drive
Control (page 261). The tow haul indicator
light illuminates in the instrument cluster
when the system is active.
196
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Transmission
The tow/haul feature:
• Moves upshifts to higher engine speeds
to reduce the frequency of
transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and
assists you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a slope.
• Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, and slow your vehicle to
help control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies
based upon the amount you press the
brake pedal.
The tow haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load.
To deactivate the tow haul feature for
column shifter and return to normal driving
mode, press the button on the gearshift
lever twice. The indicator light deactivates
when the system turns off. Tow haul mode
also deactivates when you power down
your vehicle.
To deactivate the tow haul feature for
vehicles with console shifter, cycle through
the available drive modes with the drive
modes button or rotary dial to select an
alternate mode. See Drive Control (page
261). The indicator light deactivates when
the system turns off.
SelectShift™ Automatic
Transmission
Your vehicle has a SelectShift Automatic
transmission. The SelectShift Automatic
transmission gives you the ability to
change gears up or down without a clutch
as desired.
To prevent the engine from running at too
low of an RPM, which may cause it to stall,
SelectShift still makes some downshifts
if it determines that you have not
downshifted in time. Although SelectShift
makes some downshifts for you, it still
allows you to downshift at any time as long
as the SelectShift determines that damage
to the engine does not occur from
over-revving.
Note: Engine damage could occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
E252861
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes: Progressive Range
Selection (PRS) and M mode.
Progressive Range Selection - PRS
Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with
an improved driving experience, for
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep slope.
197
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Transmission
With the transmission selector in drive (D),
push the – button to active PRS. The
available and selected gears show on the
instrument cluster.
All available gears display with the current
gear indicated. Push the – button again to
lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear. For example, push the – button twice
to lock out 10th and 9th gears. Only the
available gears display and the
transmission automatically shifts between
the available gears. Push the + button to
unlock gears and allow the transmission
to shift to higher gears. The transmission
shifts automatically within the gear range
you select.
Manual (M)
Pushing the manual (M) button on the
selector allows you to manually select the
gear you desire or by moving the shifter
column to the manual (M) position. Only
the current gear displays. Use the buttons
on the transmission selector to manually
select gears. Push the + button to upshift
or the – button to downshift. Once in
manual mode, press manual (M) again to
deactivate manual control, or place the
column in the preferred position.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. Shift it manually by pushing the +
button.
Brake-Shift Interlock (Console
Shifter Only)
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
always fully apply the parking brake prior
to doing this procedure. Use wheels
chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if you use this procedure.
Note: For some markets, this feature
disables.
Your vehicle comes with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
transmission from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and you have
not pressed the brake pedal.
If you cannot move the selector out of park
(P) with the ignition in the on position and
the brake pedal pressed, a malfunction
may have occurred. It is possible that a
fuse has blown, or your vehicle’s brake
lamps are not operating properly. See Fuse
Specification Chart (page 315).
If the fuse has not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure allows you to move the gearshift
lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake and start the
engine before performing this
procedure.
2. Locate your brake-shift interlock
access slot. The slot is in your center
console storage bin. The access slot
does not have a label.
198
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Transmission
E253438
3. Insert a screwdriver into the slot, press
in and hold the brake shift interlock
switch, inside the slot on the console.
4. With the override switch still held, put
the transmission selector in neutral
(N).
5. Release the override button.
6. You can shift into gear and drive the
vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is normal and
does not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process fully updates transmission
operation.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission could occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires could occur, or the
engine could overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
199
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Transmission
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
Note: For important information regarding
safe operation of this type of vehicle, see
General Information in the Wheels and Tires
chapter.
Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4H and 4L mode
is only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these
surfaces may produce some noise, such as
occasional clunks, but does not damage
drive components.
Note: If 4L mode is selected when your
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
the 4WD system does not perform a shift.
This is normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L for
proper operation.
4X4 Indicator Lights
4X2
E181778
Momentarily illuminates when
2H is selected.
4X4 AUTO
E181781
Continuously illuminates when
4A is selected.
4X4 HIGH
E181779
Continuously illuminates when
4H is selected.
4X4 LOW
E181780
Continuously illuminates when
4L is selected.
CHECK 4X4
Displays when a 4X4 system
fault is present.
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system typically remains in whichever
4WD mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It does not default to
4X2 in all circumstances. When this warning
is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by
an authorized dealer.
4WD Switch Selections
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with RSC®, the system
automatically turns off the stability
enhancement feature when you shift the
4WD system into 4L - 4X4 LOW. You can
manually turn the system off by pressing
the AdvanceTrac button. See Using
Traction Control (page 213). This turns off
the engine management feature, allowing
the vehicle to maintain full power and
enhanced momentum through the obstacle.
The brake traction enhancement feature is
still turned on.
Note: The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the transfer
case clutch and disable it during driving
maneuvers when necessary.
Note: 4WD mode availability is based on
Drive Mode selection. See Drive Control
(page 261).
200
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: The information display may show
messages during 4WD operation. See
Information Messages (page 123).
Your 4X4 control is located in one of the
following locations:
• On the instrument panel.
• On the DRIVE MODE selection switch.
2H - 4X2
Delivers power to the rear wheels only. The
information display momentarily shows
2H when this mode is selected. This mode
is appropriate for normal on-road driving
on dry pavement and provides the best
fuel economy.
Note: 2H may turn on or off automatically
based on Drive Mode selection. See Drive
Control (page 261).
4A - 4X4 AUTO
Provides electronic controlled four-wheel
drive with power delivered to the front and
rear wheels, as required, for increased
traction. When you select this mode, the
information display shows 4A. The system
continuously monitors road conditions,
driver input as well as other vehicle sensors
and optimizes the system's behavior based
on drive mode selection.
Note: On vehicles with a rotary drive mode
switch, 4A should remain on in Mud/Rut and
Sand but with aggressive tuning which
provides electronically locked four-wheel
drive power to front and rear wheels, the
same as traditional 4H.
Note: 4A may turn on or off automatically
based on Drive Mode selection. See Drive
Control (page 261).
4H - 4X4 HIGH
Provides electronically locked four-wheel
drive power to front and rear wheels. When
you select this mode, the information
display shows 4H. This mode is not
recommended for use on dry pavement.
This mode is only intended for severe
winter or off-road conditions, such as deep
snow, ice or shallow sand.
Note: 4H may turn on or off automatically
based on Drive Mode selection. In
configurations with a rotary Drive Mode
switch, 4H functionality is within the
Mud/Ruts and Sand Drive Modes even when
the indicator lamp shows 4A. See Drive
Control (page 261).
4L - 4X4 LOW
Provides electronically locked four-wheel
drive power to both the front and rear
wheels with additional gearing for
increased torque multiplication. Intended
only for off-road applications such as deep
sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy
objects. 4L - 4X4 low does not engage
when your vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h); this is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or
from 4L - 4X4 low for proper operation.
Note: 4L may turn off automatically based
on Drive Mode selection. See Drive Control
(page 261).
Shifting Between 4WD System Modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal when a shift in progress message
displays improves engagement and
disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
201
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
You can change between 2H to 4A or 4H
at a stop or when driving. The information
display may show a message indicating a
4X4 shift is in progress and the LED light
for the selected mode flashes. Once the
shift is complete the information display
shows the system mode selected and the
LED light for the selected mode turns solid.
Shifting To or From 4L - 4X4 LOW
Note: 4L mode is not intended for use on
dry pavement.
1. Bring the vehicle to a rolling speed of
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the gearshift in neutral (N).
3. Move the 4WD switch to the desired
mode.
The information display shows a message
indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. The
information display then shows the
selected system mode. If any of the
previous shift conditions are not present,
the shift does not occur and the
information display shows information
guiding you through the proper shifting
procedures. If the above conditions are not
satisfied in 30 seconds, the system reverts
back to the previous 4WD mode or drive
mode.
If Shift Delayed Pull Forward is displayed
in the information display, transfer case
gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate
this condition, place the transmission in a
forward gear, move the vehicle forward
approximately 5 ft (2 m), and shift the
transmission back to neutral (N) to allow
the transfer case to complete the range
shift.
Operating 4WD Vehicles With
Spare or Mismatched Tires
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of
the spare tire can affect the 4X4 system.
If there is a significant difference between
the size of the spare tire and the remaining
tires, you may have limited four-wheel
drive functionality.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with a 4WD
mode turned on.
• Turn on a 4WD mode unless the
vehicle is stationary.
• Use a 4WD mode on dry pavement.
Use of a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly may lead to impairment of the
following:
• Comfort and noise.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet driving capability.
• Four-wheel drive capability.
How Your Vehicle Differs From
Other Vehicles
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
202
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the
area. To maintain steering and braking
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and
Utility Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive when
your vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.
Note: Your vehicle may have a front air dam
that can become damaged, due to reduced
ground clearance, when taking your vehicle
off-road. You may remove this air dam by
removing eight bolts.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
and rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both
on and off the road.
The transfer case supples power to all four
wheels. On four-wheel drive vehicles, the
transfer case allows you to select different
4WD modes when necessary. You can find
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures in this chapter. You can
find information on transfer case
maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
You should become thoroughly familiar
with this information before you operate
your vehicle.
Four-wheel drive, when you select a 4WD
mode, uses all four wheels to power your
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot.
Basic Operating Principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
• Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and
may damage drive components. 4H or
4L modes are only for consistently
slippery or loose surfaces.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed decreases, ease
your vehicle back onto the road. Do not
turn the steering wheel sharply when
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
203
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle, for example, turn the steering
wheel only as rapidly and as far as required
to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering
can result in loss of vehicle control. Apply
smooth pressure to the accelerator pedal
or brake pedal when changes in vehicle
speed are required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another, for example, from
concrete to gravel, there is a change in the
way your vehicle responds to a maneuver,
for example, steering, acceleration or
braking.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
maximizes the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying improves
by applying light pressure to the brake
pedal when slowly moving.
204
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or
hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you want to use. Do
not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other
side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause vehicle
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power can cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire
chains or cables, then it is critical that
you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down,
allow for longer stopping distances and
avoid aggressive steering to reduce the
chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death.
If the rear end of your vehicle slides while
cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of your
vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
205
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide when driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it does not stop any faster
as braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal. See Hints on Driving With
Anti-Lock Brakes (page 209).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Parking
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake. Make sure you shift into
park (P) for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when
the transfer case is in the neutral (N)
position, the engine and transmission
disconnect from the rest of the driveline.
Therefore, your vehicle is free to roll even
if it is parked. Do not leave your vehicle
unattended with the transfer case in the
neutral (N) position. Always set the parking
brake fully and turn off the ignition when
leaving your vehicle.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts, for example, lift kits or
stabilizer bars or by using replacement
parts not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
206
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or
device, such as ladders or luggage racks.
Any modifications to your vehicle that raise
the center of gravity may cause your
vehicle to roll over when there is a loss of
vehicle control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
207
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
(IF EQUIPPED)
The Electronic Limited Slip Differential
(eLSD) system directs torque, enabling the
vehicle to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional axle cannot.
The system is active at all times and
requires no input from the driver.
Note: If your vehicle is not at optimal
operating conditions or a system fault is
present, a warning may be displayed in the
instrument cluster. Depending on the
warning, your vehicle may need to be
serviced. For more information regarding the
system information messages, See
Information Messages (page 123).
Locking Function (If Equipped)
E163170
The lock button engages ‘locker
mode’.
With the locker engaged, the system
electronically locks the differential causing
both half shafts to turn at the same rate.
This increases traction during off road
events.
The locker mode may automatically
disengage based on certain conditions
such as vehicle speed. When engaged, a
telltale in the instrument cluster will
illuminate amber and the switch button
will be illuminated. When the speed is
exceeded the telltale will turn gray, the
locker will be disengaged and be in
standby mode until the speed conditions
are met. If the eLSD system is faulted and
the locker cannot engage, a warning
message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster and the switch button
will flash.
Spare Tire
If your vehicle is equipped with an
Electronic Limited Slip Differential, a spare
tire of a different size than the tire
provided, should not be used. If a spare tire
is installed, a message may appear,
indicating the system has disabled
automatically or reduced function to
prevent system overheat and damage. It
is recommended to reinstall the repaired
or replaced road tire as soon as possible.
When the road tire is replaced, the system
will resume normal operation on the next
key cycle.
Trailer Towing
The Electronic Limited Slip Differential
enhances vehicle stability during trailer tow
operation. During high demand trailering
events (such as steep grades, high speeds
or with a spare tire), the system may
provide a warning in the instrument cluster
and reduce function or enter a temporarily
disabled state. To resume normal function,
stop the vehicle in a safe location and
allow the unit to adequately cool. Once
the system has reached normal operating
temperatures, system function will be
restored and the Electronic Limited Slip
Differential Restored message will be
displayed.
208
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Rear Axle
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and an
authorized dealer should check them. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, an
authorized dealer should check your vehicle.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 348).
E138644
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 110).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Switch the engine off, move the
transmission to park (P) and apply the
parking brake. Inspect the accelerator
pedal and the area around it for any items
or debris that may be obstructing its
movement.If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at
which you press the brake pedal. It
provides maximum braking efficiency as
long as you press the pedal. Emergency
brake assist can reduce stopping distances
in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the anti-lock braking system may
be disabled. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E138644
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates with the parking
brake released, have your brake
system serviced immediately.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
209
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Brakes
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift
into park (P). Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
WARNING: The electric parking
brake does not operate if the vehicle
battery is running out of charge.
Your vehicle has an electric parking brake.
You operate it with a switch instead of a
lever. The switch is on the center console
or to the left-hand side of the steering
wheel, on the lower part of the instrument
panel.
Note: The electric parking brake makes
noises during operation. This is normal.
Applying the Electric Parking
Brake
E267156
Pull the switch upward.
E270480
The red warning lamp flashes
during operation and illuminates
when the parking brake is
applied.
Note: It remains illuminated for a short
period of time after you switch the ignition
off.
If it continues to flash or does not
illuminate, the system has malfunctioned.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake could
automatically apply when you shift into park
(P). See Transmission (page 193).
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in
an Emergency
Note: Do not apply the electric parking
brake when your vehicle is moving, except
in an emergency. If you repeatedly use the
electric parking brake to slow or stop your
vehicle, you could cause damage to the
brake system.
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold
it.
E270480
The red warning lamp
illuminates, a tone sounds and
the stoplamps turn on.
The electric parking brake continues to
slow your vehicle down unless you release
the switch.
Manually Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
210
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Brakes
E267156
Push the switch downward.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the
system has malfunctioned. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold
it.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal until engine
has developed sufficient torque to prevent
your vehicle from rolling down the hill.
E267156
Release the switch and pull
away in a normal manner.
Automatically Releasing the
Electric Parking Brake
Close the driver door.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal and pull away
in a normal manner.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the
electric parking brake has not released.
Manually release the parking brake.
Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake if the Vehicle Battery is
Running Out of Charge
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
battery to release the electric parking brake
if the vehicle battery is running out of
charge. See Jump Starting the Vehicle
(page 304).
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will turn
off if a malfunction is apparent or if you
rev the engine excessively. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
211
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Brakes
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed and shift into
first gear when facing uphill or reverse
(R) when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
212
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The stability and
traction control light illuminates steadily
if the system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
E130458
When you switch the system off,
a message and an illuminated
icon appear on the instrument
cluster.
Use the switch again to return the traction
control system to normal operation.
The switch for the stability and traction
control system is on the instrument panel.
Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictions
regarding this feature. See Principle of
Operation (page 64).
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes:
• When a driving condition activates
either of the systems.
• If a problem occurs in either of the
systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on:
• When you switch the traction control
system off.
• When you select an alternative stability
control mode.
213
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket
roof racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic
stability control system. In addition,
installing any stereo loudspeakers may
interfere with and adversely affect the
electronic stability control system. Install
any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as
far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats
in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of
the electronic stability control system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the
laws of physics. It’s always possible to
lose control of a vehicle due to
inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk
of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the electronic stability
control system is an indication that at
least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your
electronic stability control system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
• The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
214
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 213).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
Stability Control and Traction
Control with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC™)
The system automatically activates when
you start your engine. You can switch off
the electronic stability control and roll
stability control portions of the system
below 35 mph (56 km/h). When the
transmission is in reverse (R), they are
disabled. You can switch off the traction
control portion of the system
independently. See Using Traction
Control (page 213).
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features
Traction
control system
Electronic
stability
control
Roll stability
control
Stability
control OFF
light
Button func-
tions
EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminated
during bulb
check
Default at start-
up
Disabled
1
Enabled
1
EnabledIlluminatedButton pressed
momentarily
215
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features
Disabled
4
DisabledDisabledFlashes then
illuminated
solid
2
Button pressed
and held for
more than 5
seconds at
vehicle speed
under 35 mph
(56 km/h)
Disabled
1
Enabled
1
EnabledIlluminatedVehicle speed
exceeds 35 mph
(56 km/h) after
button is
pressed and
held for more
than 5 seconds
EnabledEnabledEnabledNot illuminatedButton pressed
again after
deactivation
Disabled
4
DisabledDisabledIlluminatedButton not
pressed and the
transfer case is
switched to 4X4
Low
3
1
The traction control system may still be enabled but with higher entry thresholds
compared to the full system. The electronic stability control entry thresholds are higher
compared to the full system.
2
When you press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds the indicator lamp blinks
for three seconds.
3
Your vehicle may or may not have this feature available. When you select 4X4 Low the
stability control light illuminates and all stability control with RSC features are disabled.
4
Engine traction control and two-wheel spin brake traction control functions are disabled.
Single wheel spin traction control is always enabled.
216
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Hill descent control
cannot control descent in all surface
conditions and circumstances, such as
ice or extremely steep grades. Hill
descent control is a driver assist system
and cannot substitute for good judgment
by the driver. Failure to do so may result
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious
injury.
Hill descent control allows you to set and
maintain vehicle speed when descending
steep grades in various surface conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 0 mph
(3 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). Above
20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but you cannot use the system to
set or maintain the descent speed.
Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after a period of sustained
use. The amount of time that the feature
can remain active before cooling varies
with conditions. The system provides a
warning in the message center and a tone
sounds when the system is about to
disengage for cooling. At this time,
manually apply the brakes as needed to
maintain descent speed.
USING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL
Press and release the hill
descent button on the
instrument panel. The button
illuminates and a chime sounds when you
switch this feature on.
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the
desired speed. To decrease descent
speed, press the brake pedal until you
reach the desired speed.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
you reach the desired descent speed,
remove your feet from the pedals and hill
descent control maintains the chosen
vehicle speed.
Note: You may observe noise from the ABS
pump motor during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.
Hill Descent Modes
• At speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h)
and 20 mph (32 km/h): When you
press this button, the light flashes
indicating this feature is active. Your
vehicle maintains the speed you desire
while in this mode.
• At speeds between 20 mph (32 km/h)
and 40 mph (64 km/h): When you
press this button, the light is solid and
a message appears in the information
display indicating this feature is active.
Your vehicle does not maintain the
speed you desire and you cannot set
your descent speed.
• At speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h):
When you press this button, the system
turns this feature off and no light or
message appears in the information
display. You need to switch this feature
back on to use.
Refer to Information Displays for hill
descent control messages. See
Information Messages (page 123).
217
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This
may cause reduced performance or false
alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false beeps. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms. See your
authorized technician.
Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide warnings.
Disable the rear parking aid when a trailer
is connected to prevent these warnings.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 64).
We recommend that you take some time
to get to know the system and its
limitations by reading this section.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system automatically turns
on each time you switch the ignition on.
When receiving a detection warning, the
radio volume reduces to a predetermined
level. After the warning goes away, the
radio volume returns to the previous level.
E139213
You can turn the system on or
off by pressing the parking aid
button. If your vehicle does not
have a parking aid button, the system can
be switched off through the information
display menu or from the pop-up message
that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 114).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display and does not allow you to switch
the system on. See Information
Messages (page 123).
If a sensor is blocked and cannot function,
the system becomes disabled and a
warning message appears in the
information display. The system returns to
a normal state once the blockage is
cleared.
218
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
REAR PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
Note: Some accessories, for example large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
The sensors are on the rear bumper.
The sensors are active when the
transmission is in reverse (R) and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
When the parking aid system sounds a
tone, the audio system may reduce the set
volume.
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the center of the rear
bumper.
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
E130178
The sensor coverage area is up to 70 in
(180 cm) from the rear bumper.
If the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the information
display.
The system detects large objects when
you shift into reverse (R) and any of the
following occur:
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
speed.
• Your vehicle is stationary but an object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at low speed.
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
speed and an object is moving toward
your vehicle, for example another
vehicle at low speed.
219
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
If your vehicle remains stationary for two
seconds the audible warning turns off. If
your vehicle moves backward the tone
sounds again.
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
or less from the rear bumper, the audible
warning does not turn off.
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E190459
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object
decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
icon.
• If the system does not detect an object,
the distance indicator blocks are gray.
When you shift into reverse (R), the system
provides audible warnings and visual
indication when your vehicle is moving and
the detected object is moving toward your
vehicle. When you stop your vehicle, the
audible warnings stop after two seconds.
Visual indication remains on when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
FRONT PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
Note: Some accessories, for example large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
The sensors are on the front bumper.
The sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P). When the parking aid system
sounds a tone, the audio system may
reduce the set volume.
220
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
A warning tone sounds when your vehicle
approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
The system turns off when the vehicle
speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h).
E187330
The sensor coverage area is up to 28 in
(70 cm) from the center of the bumper.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
system detects objects when your vehicle
is moving at low speed or an object is
moving toward your vehicle, for example
another vehicle at low speed. When you
stop your vehicle, the audible warning turns
off after two seconds.
If the transmission is in any forward gear,
the system provides audible warnings
when your vehicle is moving and an object
is within the detection area. When you stop
your vehicle, the audible warning turns off
after two seconds and the visual warning
turns off after four seconds.
If the system detects a fault, a warning
message appears in the information
display.
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E190459
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object
decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
icon.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicator blocks are gray.
When you shift into any forward gear, the
system provides audible warnings and
visual indication when your vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or below and the system detects
an object within the detection zone. When
you stop your vehicle, the audible warnings
stop after two seconds and visual
indication stops after four seconds.
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm)
or less from your vehicle, visual indication
remains on.
221
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
When you shift into neutral (N), the system
only provides visual indication if your
vehicle is moving at a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or below,
for example, your vehicle is moving on a
slope, and the system detects an object
moving toward your vehicle. When you
stop your vehicle, visual indication stops
after four seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The parking aid system
can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
The system uses the front and rear
outermost parking aid sensors to detect
objects that are near to the sides of your
vehicle. The system displays them on a
virtual map in the information display as
your vehicle moves past them.
The sensors are on the front and rear
bumpers.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this may
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.
The system may not function if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on within a few seconds.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system activates.
• The traction control system activates.
Note: If you switch traction control off, the
side sensing system also turns off.
Note: Some accessories, for example large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
To reinitialize the system, you may have to
drive your vehicle approximately 10 ft
(3 m).
E190458
The sensor coverage area is up to 24 in
(60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
222
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
When the system detects an object within
the coverage area and the driving path of
your vehicle, an audible warning sounds.
As your vehicle moves closer to the object,
the rate of the tone increases.
Note: The system does not detect an object
that is moving toward the side of your
vehicle, for example another vehicle moving
at low speed, if it does not pass a front or
rear sensor.
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E190459
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object
decreases, the indicator blocks
illuminate and move toward the vehicle
icon.
• If there is no object detected, the
distance indicator blocks are gray.
When you shift into reverse (R), the system
provides audible warnings and a visual
indication when detected objects are
within 24 in (60 cm) and are inside the
driving path of your vehicle. When you stop
your vehicle, the audible warnings turn off
after two seconds.
When you shift into any forward gear, the
system provides audible warnings and a
visual indication when your vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or below and the system detects
an object within the detection zone. When
you stop your vehicle, the audible warnings
turn off after two seconds and the visual
indication turns off after four seconds.
When you shift into neutral (N), the system
only provides a visual indication if your
vehicle is moving at a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or below.
For example, your vehicle is moving on a
slope, and the system detects an object
moving toward your vehicle. When you
stop your vehicle, the visual indication
turns off after four seconds.
If the system is not available, the side
distance indicator blocks do not display.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: You must remain in
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The sensors may not
detect objects in heavy rain or other
conditions that cause interference.
223
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
WARNING: Active park assist does
not apply the brakes under any
circumstances.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
Active park assist is a multi-step process
and may require you to shift the
transmission multiple times. Follow the
onscreen instructions until the parking
maneuver is complete.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system by grabbing the
steering wheel, or by taking full control of
your vehicle after pressing the active park
assist button.
Keep your hands, hair, clothing and any
loose items clear of the steering wheel
when using active park assist.
The sensors are on the front and rear
bumpers.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
The sensors may falsely detect objects due
to ultrasonic interference caused by
motorcycle exhausts, truck air brakes or
horns, for example.
Note: If you change any tires, the system
must recalibrate and may not correctly
operate for a short time.
The system may not correctly operate in
any of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire that is
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
• One or more tires are incorrectly
inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space. For
example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
• The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck.
• The weather conditions are poor. For
example, during heavy rain, snow, fog,
high humidity and high temperatures.
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached an add-on
accessory close to the sensors on the
front or rear of your vehicle. For
example, a bike rack or trailer.
• You have attached an overhanging
object to the roof. For example, a
surfboard.
• The front bumper, rear bumper or the
side sensors are damaged.
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle. For example, a mini-spare tire.
Using Active Park Assist
Selecting an Active Park Assist Mode
E146186
Press the button once to
activate parallel parking. Press
the button a second time to
activate perpendicular parking. If you press
the button again the system switches off.
224
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
If your vehicle is parked and after you
switch the ignition on, you can use the
information display to toggle through the
modes. Press the button to switch the
system on and open the system menu in
the information display.
Note: If your vehicle is parked, the default
mode is parallel park out assist. However,
if you did not use active park assist to
parallel park your vehicle, use the
information display to select park out assist.
Note: You can repeatedly press the active
park assist button to toggle through the
modes only after moving your vehicle
approximately 33 ft (10 m).
To toggle through the modes, use the
buttons on the information display to
select the following:
• Parallel parking.
• Perpendicular parking.
• Parallel park out assist.
• Switch the system off.
Note: There is no time limit for toggling
through the modes.
Parallel Parking
The system detects available parallel
parking spaces and steers your vehicle into
the space. You control the accelerator,
gearshift and brakes. The system visually
and audibly guides you into a parallel
parking space.
E146186
Press the button once to search
for a parking space.
Note: You can also switch the system on
after you have already driven partially or
completely past a parking space. Press the
active park assist button and the system
informs you if you have recently passed a
suitable parking space.
When the vehicle speed is less than
22 mph (35 km/h), the system scans both
sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. A message and a graphic
appear in the information display to
indicate the system is searching for a
parking space. Use the direction indicator
lever to search for a parking space on the
driver or passenger side of your vehicle.
Note: The system scans both sides of your
vehicle and offers parking spaces one side
at a time if you do not use the direction
indicator.
Note: The system defaults to the passenger
side if you do not use the direction indicator.
E130107
Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and parallel to the other parked vehicles
when searching for a parking space.
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft
(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away
from other parked vehicles, the system may
not be able to detect an available parking
space.
When the system detects a suitable space,
a message displays and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreen
instructions. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may have to move forward a
short distance before the system is ready
to park.
Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.
Note: The system always offers the last
parking space it detects. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces when you
are driving, it offers the last one.
225
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the
system shows a message to instruct you to
reduce the vehicle speed.
Automatically Steering into a Parallel
Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your
hands off the steering wheel and nothing
obstructing its movement, your vehicle
steers itself into the space. The system
displays instructions to move your vehicle
backward and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you
interrupt the maneuver, or the system
switches off, you must take full control of
your vehicle.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct
you to stop your vehicle. The system may
not provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
E130108
When you believe your vehicle is correctly
parked, or a solid tone sounds and an
information message appears, bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.
When the Active Park Assist maneuver is
complete, a tone sounds and an
information message appears.
Note: You are responsible for checking how
your vehicle is parked and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system
by:
• Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30
seconds when searching for a parking
space.
• Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
an active maneuver.
• Switching the traction control system
off.
Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
• The traction control system activates
or fails.
• The anti-lock brake system activates
or fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message
appears and a tone sounds. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Perpendicular Parking
The system detects available
perpendicular parking spaces and steers
your vehicle into the space. You control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you into
a perpendicular parking space.
E146186
Press the button twice to search
for a parking space.
226
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
When the vehicle speed is less than 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system scans both sides of
your vehicle for an available parking space.
A message and a graphic appear in the
information display to indicate the system
is searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator lever to search for a
parking space on the driver or passenger
side of your vehicle.
Note: The system scans both sides of your
vehicle and offers parking spaces one side
at a time if you do not use the direction
indicator.
Note: The system defaults to the passenger
side if you do not use the direction indicator.
E186193
Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and perpendicular to the other parked
vehicles when searching for a parking
space.
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft
(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away
from other parked vehicles, the system may
not be able to detect an available parking
space.
When the system detects a suitable space,
a message displays and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreen
instructions. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may have to move forward a
short distance before the system is ready
to park.
Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces when you
are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), the
system shows a message to instruct you to
reduce the vehicle speed.
Automatically Steering into a
Perpendicular Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your
hands off the steering wheel and nothing
obstructing its movement, your vehicle
steers itself into the space. The system
displays instructions to move your vehicle
backward and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you
interrupt the maneuver, or the system
switches off, you must take full control of
your vehicle.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct
you to stop your vehicle. The system may
not provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
E186191
When you believe your vehicle is correctly
parked, or a solid tone sounds and an
information message appears, bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.
227
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
When the active park assist maneuver is
complete, a tone sounds and a message
appears.
Note: You are responsible for checking how
your vehicle is parked and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system
by:
• Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30
seconds when searching for a parking
space.
• Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
an active maneuver.
• Switching the traction control system
off.
Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
• The traction control system activates
or fails.
• The anti-lock brake system activates
or fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message
appears and a tone sounds. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Parallel Park Out Assist
The system steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space. You control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you out
of a parallel parking space.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
when exiting a perpendicular parking space.
E146186
Press the button once when your
vehicle is stationary in a parallel
parking space.
Note: If you did not use active park assist
to parallel park your vehicle, pressing the
button once selects parallel park. You must
use the information display to select park
out assist.
The system displays a message instructing
you to switch a direction indicator on. Use
the direction indicator to select which side
of your vehicle you want to exit the parking
space. The system displays instructions to
move your vehicle backward and forward
in the space.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct
you to stop your vehicle. The system may
not provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
E188012
After the system directs your vehicle to a
position where you can exit the parking
space in a forward movement, a message
appears instructing you to take full control
of your vehicle. Generally, hand-over is
when your vehicle is still inside the parking
space.
Note: Parallel Park Out Assist may not be
available when the clearance to the front
or the rear of your vehicle is too small.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you
interrupt the maneuver, or the system
switches off, you must take full control of
your vehicle.
228
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Troubleshooting
Possible CauseSymptom
You may have switched the traction control off.The system does not search for
a parking space.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must
be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, ice
or dirt buildup. Blocked sensors can affect how the
system functions.
The system does not offer a
parking space.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your
vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on
the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than
2 ft (0.5 m) away.
The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h)
for parallel parking or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
for perpendicular parking.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After
you reconnect the battery you must drive your vehicle
on a straight road for a short period of time.
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the
current transmission position. For example, rolling
forward when in reverse (R).
The system does not correctly
position your vehicle in a
parking space.
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the
system from correctly aligning your vehicle.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be
correctly parked.
Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained.
For example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or of
different sizes.
A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.
229
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
Possible CauseSymptom
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example,
a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects
changes after your vehicle passes the space.
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes.
For example, driving from a heated garage into the cold,
or after leaving a car wash.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use
it in conjunction with the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be
incorrect. All guidelines disappear when
the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door, above the license
plate.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
230
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show
the intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object. For
example, a trailer.
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner. The rear view camera has a
washer that activates when you use
the rear window washer. See Rear
Window Wiper and Washers (page
93).
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
See General Information (page 114).
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelines (If equipped)A
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
231
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change
the steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
E190459
The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
232
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
360 DEGREE CAMERA (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The 360 degree
camera system still requires the driver
to use it in conjunction with looking out
of the windows, and checking the interior
and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
off when your vehicle is in motion at low
speed, except when in reverse (R).
The 360 degree camera system consists
of front, side and rear cameras. The
system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in
front or behind your vehicle.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
• Allows you to see a top-down view of
the area outside your vehicle, including
the blind spots.
• Provides visibility around your vehicle
to you in parking maneuvers such as:
• Centering in a parking space.
• Obstacles near vehicle.
• Parallel parking.
Camera Views
E205884
The camera button is located on
the instrument panel and allows
you to toggle through different
camera views.
When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D),
only images from the front cameras are
displayed. Press the camera button to
display the front camera image on the
display screen.
When in reverse (R), only images from the
rear cameras are displayed. When you shift
into reverse (R), the rear view camera
image automatically shows on the display
screen.
Advanced Camera Views (If Equipped)
E233726
Additional camera views may be
available for vehicles with
specific features. Press the small
camera icon shown on the top left corner
of the display screen to open the camera
view menu.
The following camera views can be
accessed in park (P), neutral (N) or drive
(D) when you press the camera button:
• Front 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal front camera view next to a
360 degree camera view.
• Front Normal View: Provides an
image of what is directly in front of your
vehicle.
• Front Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is in front of
your vehicle.
233
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
The following camera views can be
accessed when you shift into reverse (R):
• Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal rear camera view next to a 360
degree camera view. Press the zoom
(+) button to quickly access Rear
Normal View from this screen.
• Rear Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle.
• Rear Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is behind your
vehicle.
Keep Out Zone
E225016
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle. It is designed to give you the
indication on the ground of the fully
extended outside mirror position.
Front Camera
WARNING: The front camera
system still requires the driver to use it
in conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.
E251883
The front video camera, located in the
grille, provides a video image of the area
in front of your vehicle. It adds assistance
to the driver while driving forward at low
speeds. To use the front video camera
system, place the transmission in any gear
except reverse (R). An image displays once
the camera enable button is pressed. The
area displayed on the screen may vary
according to your vehicle's orientation
and/or road condition.
Note: The front camera has a washer that
activates when you use the windshield
washers. See Windshield Washers (page
93).
Side Camera
E250816
234
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
The side view camera, located in the
outside mirror, provides a video image of
the area on the sides of your vehicle. It aids
you while parking your vehicle.
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view
while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera may be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect.
235
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Parking Aids
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
Requirements
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed
is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h).
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL
ON AND OFF
WARNING: Do not use cruise
control on winding roads, in heavy traffic
or when the road surface is slippery. This
could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 89).
Switching Cruise Control On
E265296
Press the button.
Switching Cruise Control Off
E265297
Press the button when the
system is in standby mode.
The system also turns off when you switch
the ignition off.
Note: The set speed erases when you
switch the system off.
SETTING THE CRUISE
CONTROL SPEED
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
system does not apply the brakes.
Drive to the speed you prefer.
Press either button to set the
current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color in the
information display.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release the button to
increase the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the button to accelerate.
Release the button when you reach your
preferred speed.
Press and release the button to
decrease the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold the button to decelerate.
Release the button when you reach your
preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
236
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
E265298
Press the button, or tap the
brake pedal to cancel the set
speed.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button.
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
E71340
Illuminates when you switch the
system on.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always pay close
attention to changing road conditions
when using the system. It does not
replace attentive driving. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when entering or leaving a highway, on
roads with intersections or roundabouts
or non-vehicular traffic or roads that are
winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
slopes.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has
aftermarket electronic trailer brake
controls. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of
the system. Failure to do so may result
in a loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
WARNING: The system may not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: The system does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
WARNING: The system does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the same
lane.
WARNING: The system is not a
crash warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with a snow plow blade installed.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.
The system uses a radar sensor which
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
237
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control
E262918
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 89).
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
E265296
Press and release the button.
E144529
The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.
E255686
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Drive to your preferred speed.
Press and release the button.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E255686
A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
When Your Vehicle is Stationary
Follow a vehicle to a complete stop.
E265299
Press while keeping the brake
pedal fully pressed.
The set speed adjusts to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a
vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does
not always decelerate quickly enough to
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
238
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control
WARNING: The system only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning
or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
information display and an indicator
flashes when the system continues to
brake. Take immediate action.
Following a Vehicle to a Complete
Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
less than three seconds, your vehicle
accelerates from a stationary position to
follow the vehicle ahead.
E265299
If your vehicle follows a vehicle
to a complete stop and remains
stationary for more than three
seconds, press to follow the vehicle ahead.
Or press the accelerator pedal.
Setting the Gap Distance
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.
E263697
Press and release to decrease
the gap distance.
E263696
Press and release to increase the
gap distance.
E255686
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
239
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
Behavior
Distance GapGraphic
Display,
Bars Indic-
ated
Between
Vehicles
Sport.Closest.1
Normal.Close.2
Normal.Medium.3
Comfort.Far.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, it does not automatically apply
the brakes to maintain a gap from any
vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
Use the accelerator pedal
normally to intentionally exceed
the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the green
indicator light illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
E265299
Press and release to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and release to decrease
the set speed in small
increments.
Press and hold either button to change the
set speed in large increments. Release the
button when you reach your preferred
speed.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach your preferred speed. Press
either button.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Canceling the Set Speed
E265298
Press and release the button or
tap the brake pedal.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
E265299
Press and release the button.
Your vehicle speed returns to the
previously set speed and gap setting. The
set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Automatic Cancellation
Automatic cancellation can also occur
when:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
240
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control
Park Brake Application
Automatic parking brake application and
cancellation occurs if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open
the door after you stop the vehicle.
• You hold the vehicle at a stop
continuously for more than three
minutes.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep
grades, for example in mountainous areas.
The system needs additional engine
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent it from overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
E265297
Press and release the button
when the system is in standby
mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Detection Issues
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the
road infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these
cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
E71621
241
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
Optimal system performance requires a
clear view of the road by the
windshield-mounted camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E257553
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt,
metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors and aftermarket lights may also
block the sensor.
242
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar is dirty or
obstructed.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar is clean but the
message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the
road may interfere with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control
will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.
You can change from adaptive cruise
control to normal cruise control through
the information display.
243
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The system is designed
to aid the driver. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment.
You are still responsible to drive with due
care and attention.
WARNING: At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required. Failure to take care may result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest
breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles
may result in the system warning you
even if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
E249505
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off
through the information display. See
General Information (page 114). When
activated, the system monitors your
alertness level based upon your driving
behavior in relation to the lane markings,
and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
244
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
The warning system is in two stages. At
first the system issues a temporary warning
that you need to take a rest. This message
will only appear for a short time. If the
system detects further reduction in driving
alertness, another warning may be issued
which will remain in the information display
for a longer time. Press OK on the steering
wheel control to clear the warning. When
active the system will run automatically in
the background and only issue a warning
if required.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping your vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on
your vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in
a false or missed warning.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: When you select aid or alert and aid
mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
The system may detect a light grip or touch
on the steering wheel as hands off driving.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
245
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
E249505
When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your
lane is likely to occur, the system notifies
or assists you to stay in your lane through
the steering system and information
display. In Alert mode, the system provides
a warning by vibrating the steering wheel.
In Aid mode, the system provides steering
assistance by gently counter steering your
vehicle back into the lane.
When the system is functioning in the
combined Alert and Aid mode, the system
first provides steering assistance by gently
counter steering your vehicle back into the
lane, followed by a warning that vibrates
the steering wheel if the vehicle is still out
of the lane markings.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a
MyKey™ is detected. If the system detects
a MyKey™, it defaults to on and the mode
is set to alert.
E173233
Press the button located on the
center console to switch the
system on or off.
System Settings
The system has optional menu settings
available. See General Information
(page 114). The system stores the last
known selection for each of these settings.
You do not need to readjust your settings
each time you switch on the system.
Adjust the settings to enable one of the
three modes:
Alert Only
E165515
Alert Only — Provides a steering wheel
vibration when an unintended lane
departure is detected.
Aid Only
E165516
Aid Only — Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center.
246
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Alert + Aid Mode
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid — Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the
lane, the system provides a steering wheel
vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
• Low.
• Medium.
• High.
System Display
E274073
If you switch the system on in alert mode,
a graphic with lane markings appears in
the information display.
If you switch the system on in aid or alert
and aid mode, arrows appear with the lane
markings.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
Note: The vehicle graphic may still be
displayed if adaptive cruise control is
enabled.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side. This
may be because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The direction indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Driving too close to the lane markings.
247
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side.
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
248
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not use the blind
spot information system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The
blind spot information system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
E255695
249
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone.
The detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The
detection area extends to approximately
59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when
the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h) to alert you of faster
approaching vehicles.
Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It is not designed to
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals
or other infrastructures.
Using the Blind Spot Information
System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in
reverse (R).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an
alert indicator illuminates in the exterior
mirror on the side the approaching vehicle
is coming from. If you turn the direction
indicator on for that side of your vehicle,
the alert indicator flashes.
Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.
Blocked Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
250
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
If the sensors become blocked, a message
may appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 123). The
alert indicators remain illuminated but the
system does not alert you.
Blind Spot Information System
with Trailer Tow (If Equipped)
E225007
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle and trailer, extending rearward
from the exterior mirrors to the end of your
trailer.
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You attach a trailer to your vehicle.
• You have set up the trailer to work with
the system through the information
display.
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: If you switch the Blind Spot
Information System off, the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow
automatically turns off.
Note: If you connect a trailer to your vehicle
and do not set up the trailer through the
information display, the system turns off
and a warning message appears. See
Information Messages (page 123).
Note: When towing a trailer, the extended
blind spot zone range decreases to a short
fixed or non-variable distance behind the
trailer. The extended blind spot zone range
returns to 59 ft (18 m) when the trailer is
disconnected.
Setting up a Trailer
E225008
Trailer lengthA
Trailer widthB
Trailer hitch ballC
You can set-up a trailer to work with the
system through the information display.
See General Information (page 114).
When setting up a trailer, a sequence of
screens appear asking for trailer
information.
• Select type of trailer screen -
Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck.
The system only supports conventional
trailers. If you select fifth wheel or
gooseneck, the system automatically turns
off.
• Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer
screen?
If no, the system turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
251
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
• Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) and
length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)?
If no, the system turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
• Trailer width measurement:
The width of the trailer is measured at the
front of the trailer. It is not measured at the
widest point of the trailer. The maximum
width at the front of the trailer that the
system can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m).
Note: You do not need to enter an exact
trailer width measurement. You only need
to confirm that the width of the trailer is
8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less.
• Trailer length measurement:
The trailer length is the distance between
the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the
trailer. The maximum length that the
system can support is 33 ft (10.1 m).
• Enter length of trailer:
The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m).
Toggling up or down using the menu
buttons increases or decreases the
measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select a length
that is equal to or within 3 ft (1 m) of the
actual measured length. For example, if
the actual measured length is 25 ft (7.6 m),
toggle the length in the menu to 27 ft
(8.2 m). When you enter the length of the
trailer, the system setup is saved.
Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack or
cargo rack with electrical lighting, enter a
length of 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert
remains on for trailers with a length of 3 ft
(1 m) or less.
Note: Proper measurement and
measurement entry is required for the
system to function as designed.
System Operation
When you connect a trailer to your vehicle,
the trailer set up menu appears in the
information display. This menu allows you
to set up a new trailer or choose from a
previously set up trailer. A warning
message appears and the system turns off
if you do not choose or add a new trailer.
Note: The warning message may not
appear until your vehicle speed reaches
22 mph (35 km/h).
If you select a trailer in the information
display before connecting a trailer to your
vehicle, the system loads the configuration
for the selected trailer. When a trailer is
connected, a warning message appears.
Note: A second warning message may
appear stating that the Cross Traffic Alert
system has turned off. The Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow
continues to function normally in this
situation.
Note: The system remembers the last
selected trailer set up when you start your
vehicle.
Trailer Considerations
The system is designed to work with a
trailer with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m)
or less, and a total length from the trailer
hitch ball to the rear of the trailer of 33 ft
(10.1 m) or less.
Some trailers may cause a slight change
in system performance:
• Large box trailers may cause false
alerts to occur when driving next to
infrastructures or near parked cars. A
false alert may also occur while making
a 90-degree turn.
• Trailers that have a width greater than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front and have a
total length greater than 20 ft (6 m)
may cause delayed alerts when a
vehicle is passing at high speed.
252
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
• Box trailers that have a width greater
than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front may
cause early alerts when you pass a
vehicle.
• Clam shell or V-Nose box trailers with
a width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at
the front may cause delayed alerts
when a vehicle traveling the same
speed as your vehicle merges lanes.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning
lamp illuminates and a message displays.
See Information Messages (page 123).
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch the system off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 114). When you switch
the system off, a warning lamp illuminates
and a message displays. When you switch
the system on or off, the alert indicators
flash twice.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved
by us, the system turns off when you attach
a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
reversing out of a parking space. The
cross traffic alert system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
The system alerts you of vehicles
approaching from the sides behind your
vehicle when you shift into reverse (R).
Using Cross Traffic Alert
The system detects vehicles that approach
at a speed between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases
when the sensors are partially, mostly or
fully obstructed. Slowly reversing helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of
reverse (R).
253
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
E142441
254
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely
reduced.
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when
you shift into reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert System
Limitations
The system may not correctly operate
when any of the following occur:
• The sensors are blocked.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When
Trailer is Attached
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an
approved trailer tow module and tow bar,
the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
Cross traffic alert remains on when you
attach a trailer in vehicles that come with
blind spot information system with trailer
tow under the following conditions:
• You connect a trailer.
• The trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack
with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m).
• You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m)
in the information display.
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 249).
Switching the System On and Off
To switch the system on or off, adjust the
setting. Depending on your vehicle options,
the setting could be in the following:
• Information display. See General
Information (page 114).
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 457).
Note: The system turns on every time you
switch the ignition on. To permanently
switch the system off, contact an authorized
dealer.
Cross Traffic Alert Indicator
E268294
When the system detects an
approaching vehicle, a tone
sounds, a warning lamp
illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror
and arrows appear in the information
display to show which side the
approaching vehicle is coming from.
255
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Note: If arrows do not display, a message
appears in the information display.
If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp
illuminates in the instrument cluster and
a message appears in the information
display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you, even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing further away from your vehicle.
Cross Traffic Alert Information Messages
ActionMessage
Displays instead of indication arrows when the system
detects a vehicle. Check for approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Alert
Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Clean
the sensors. If the message continues to appear, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.Cross Traffic Alert Deac-
tivated Trailer Attached
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays
in the information display. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and
watch the information display for a
steering system warning message. If a
steering system warning message
returns, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
WARNING: If the system detects
an error, you may not feel a difference in
the steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system, there is no fluid reservoir, no
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
256
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle, this increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning (If Equipped)
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
different direction, pedestrians at night,
cyclists or animals. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead
to a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during
cold and severe weather conditions.
Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can
adversely affect the system. Keep the
front camera and radar free of snow and
ice. Failure to take care may result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
weather, unconventional vehicle types,
and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
257
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
WARNING: The system cannot
help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on
this system to replace driver judgment
and the need to maintain a safe distance
and speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System
The pre-collision assist system is active at
speeds above approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) and pedestrian detection is active
at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
another stationary vehicle, a vehicle
traveling in the same direction as yours, or
a pedestrian within your driving path, the
system is designed to provide three levels
of functionality:
1. Alert
2. Brake Support
3. Active Braking
Alert: When active, a flashing visual
warning appears and an audible warning
tone sounds.
Brake Support: The system is designed
to help reduce the impact speed by
preparing the brakes for rapid braking.
Brake support does not automatically
apply the brakes. If you press the brake
pedal, the system could apply additional
braking up to maximum braking force, even
if you lightly press the brake pedal.
Active Braking: Active braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent. The system may help
the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
the crash completely.
Note: Brake support and active braking are
active at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
If the vehicle has a radar sensor or adaptive
cruise control, then brake support and active
braking are active up to the maximum speed
of the vehicle.
Note: If you perceive pre-collision assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity leads to
fewer and later system warnings.
Note: The system disables when you select
4x4 low, sand mode, mud/ruts mode or
when you manually disable AdvanceTrac™.
Distance Indication and Alert (If
Equipped)
This is a function that provides you with a
graphical indication of the time gap to
other preceding vehicles traveling in the
same direction. The distance indication
and alert screen in the information display
shows one of the following graphics.
258
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
E254791
If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is
small, a red visual indication appears.
Note: Distance indication and alert
deactivates and the graphics do not display
when adaptive cruise control is active.
Time GapDistance GapGraphicsSensitivitySpeed
>0.9sec>82 ft (25 m)GreyNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
0.6sec —
0.9sec
56–82 ft
(17–25 m)
YellowNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
<0.6sec<56 ft (17 m)RedNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the following settings by
using the information display controls. See
General Information (page 114).
• You can adjust the alert and distance
alert sensitivity to one of three settings.
• You can switch the distance indication
and alert function on or off.
• If required, you can switch active
braking on or off.
• If required, you can switch the entire
pre-collision assist feature on or off.
Note: Active braking turns on every time
you switch the ignition on.
259
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Note: If your vehicle has a radar sensor, we
recommend that you switch the system off
if you install a snowplow or similar object
in such a way that it could block the radar
sensor. Your vehicle remembers the selected
setting across key cycles.
Blocked Sensors
E305503
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
or camera appears in the information
display, the radar signals or camera images
are obstructed. If your vehicle has a radar
sensor, it is located behind a fascia cover
near the driver side of the lower grille. With
an obstructed radar, the Pre-Collision
Assist system does not function and
cannot detect a vehicle ahead. With a
blocked sensor or camera, the
Pre-Collision Assist system may not
function, or performance may reduce. The
following table lists possible causes and
actions for when this message displays.
Camera Troubleshooting
ActionCause
Clean the outside of the windshield in front
of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is
dirty or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the camera to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is
clean but the message remains in the
display screen.
260
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display
screen.
The pre-collision assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Pre-collision assist automat-
ically reactivates a short time after the
weather conditions improve.
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog is interfering
with the radar signals.
The pre-collision assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Pre-collision assist automat-
ically reactivates a short time after the
weather conditions improve.
Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front-
end impact.
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing
zone may change. This could cause missed
or false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message could display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. This message
deactivates automatically when operational
conditions are correct. For example, when
the ambient temperature around the sensor
decreases or the sensor automatically
recalibrates successfully.
DRIVE CONTROL
Selectable Drive Modes
The system delivers a driving experience
through a suite of sophisticated electronic
vehicle systems. These systems optimize
steering, handling and powertrain
response. This provides a single location
to control multiple systems performance
settings.
Changing the drive mode automatically
changes the functionality of the following
systems:
261
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
• Electronically power-assisted steering
system adjusts steering effort and feel
based on the mode you select. See
Steering (page 256).
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control
in adverse conditions or high
performance driving. See Stability
Control (page 214).
• Electronic throttle control enhances
the powertrain response to your inputs.
• Driveline settings optimize with shift
schedules tuned to each drive mode.
Using the System
The system automatically tailors your
vehicle configuration for each mode you
select.
The drive mode switch is in one of three
places, depending on your vehicle
configuration:
On the column shifter
E249567
On the center console
E257552
On the DRIVE MODE rotary switch.
E246604
Note: Mode changes are not available when
the vehicle ignition is off or when the engine
is not running.
On-Road Modes
E225310
Normal - For everyday driving.
This mode is a perfect balance
of excitement, comfort and
convenience.
262
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
E246593
Sport - For aggressive on-road
driving. This mode increases
throttle response, provides a
sportier steering feel, along with quicker
shifting. The suspension stiffens, with an
emphasis on handling and control. The
transmission also holds gears longer,
helping your vehicle accelerate faster when
shifting gears.
E246592
Tow/Haul - For improved
transmission operation when
towing a trailer or a heavy load.
This mode moves upshifts to higher engine
speeds to reduce the frequency of
transmission shifting. This mode also
provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and assists
you in controlling your vehicle when
descending a grade. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies based
on the amount you press the brake pedal.
Note: All transmission gear ranges are
available when using Tow/Haul.
E246597
ECO - For efficient and
responsible driving. This mode
helps deliver maximum fuel
efficiency and increases driving range.
Off-Road Modes
E225312
E246594
Snow/Wet (4X2) or Grass/
Gravel/Snow (4WD) - For firm
surfaces covered with loose or
slippery material such as packed
snow, ice, water, grass or a thin
layer of gravel or sand.
E246596
Sand - For soft dry sand or deep
gravel.
E246595
Mud/Ruts - For muddy, rutted,
soft or uneven terrain.
Note: The system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system for
proper operation. Certain drive modes are
not available based on gear shifter position.
If a mode is unavailable due to a system
fault, the mode defaults to Normal.
Transfer Case Availability
If Equipped with Rotary Drive Mode Switch
SandMud/Ruts
Tow/
Haul
Grass/
Gravel/
Snow
ECOSportNormal
Not Avail-
able
Not Avail-
able
Available
Not Avail-
able
DefaultAvailableDefault2H
Default
Off Road
Tuning
Default
Off Road
Tuning
Available
Default
Slippery
Tuning
Available
Normal
Tuning
Default
Sport
Tuning
Avail-
able
Normal
Tuning
4A
AvailableAvailableAvailableAvailable
Not Avail-
able
Not Avail-
able
Avail-
able
4L
1
1
If Equipped.
263
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
If Equipped with Column Shifter Drive Mode Switch
Tow/Haul
Grass/Gravel/
Snow
ECOSportNormal
AvailableNot AvailableDefaultAvailableDefault2H
Available
DefaultAvailable
Default
Available
4A
1
Slippery
Tuning
Normal
Tuning
Sport Tuning
Normal
Tuning
AvailableAvailableNot AvailableNot AvailableAvailable
4H
1
AvailableAvailableNot AvailableNot AvailableAvailable
4L
1
1
If Equipped.
Note: The drive mode reverts to Normal
when you start your vehicle.
Note: Your vehicle remembers the 4WD
mode across ignition cycles.
Note: Each drive mode has an associated
default 4WD mode, however you can still
select different 4WD modes using the 4WD
switch based on your preference.
264
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
Cargo Management System
A storage area is located in the floor of the
rear cargo area. There are two types of
storage systems depending on your
vehicle.
Short Wheel Base System
E250821
Lift up on the handle to open the cover.
Note: The board operates with friction
hinges, which allows it to be put in any
position between a 0° and a 90° angle.
E250823
To close, lower the cover.
Long Wheel Base System
The long wheel base system has two
separate storage compartments. To
access these compartments, there is a
bifolding cover.
E250822
Lift up on the handle and fold back to open
the cover.
Note: The board operates with friction
hinges, which allows it to be put in any
position between a 0° and a 90° angle.
E250824
E250825
To access the second storage
compartment, fold the cover back a
second time.
To close, lower the cover.
265
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
Advanced System: Forward
Divider, Cargo Shelf and Rear
Barrier (Bulkhead Position) (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Do not load any objects
on the shelf that may obstruct your vision
or strike occupants of the vehicle in the
case of a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING: Do not place people or
pets on or under the parcel shelf.
The board moves to the same positions
for both the short wheel base and long
wheel base advanced systems.
Advanced Short Wheel Base System
E250826
A storage compartment is located in the
floor of the rear cargo area. The cover
operates on friction hinges. Lift up on the
handle to open the cover. To close, lower
the cover.
Advanced Long Wheel Base System
E250827
With the advanced long wheel base
system, there is an additional cover with
an extra storage compartment underneath.
This cover also operates on friction hinges.
Lift up on the handle to open the cover. To
close, lower the cover.
Forward Divider
E250828
To move the board into the divider position,
lift up on the handle and position the board
vertically at a 90° angle.
Note: The board operates on friction hinges,
which allows it to be put in any position
between a 0° and a 90° angle.
Cargo Shelf
E250829
To move the board into the shelf position,
lift the board and move it to the horizontal
position. Once the board is horizontal,
insert the forward facing nubs into the
hooks on either side.
266
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
For the short wheel base system, it is
necessary for the second panel located
toward the front of the vehicle to be raised
up when the seats are folded down.
For the long wheel base system, it is
necessary for the second panel located
toward the front of the vehicle to be raised
up.
Note: Before moving the board into the
shelf position, you may need to flip down
the hooks.
Note: Do not put more than 50 lb (22 kg)
on shelf.
Rear Barrier (Bulkhead Position)
E250830
To move the board into the rear barrier or
bulkhead position, lift the board and move
it to the vertical position. Once the board
is vertical, insert the rearward facing nubs
into the hooks on either side.
Note: Before moving the board into the rear
barrier or bulkhead position, you may need
to flip down the hooks.
CARGO NETS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: This net is not designed
to restrain objects during a collision or
heavy braking.
The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area.
E275127
1. Fold down the hooks on the top of the
rear quarter trim panel.
E275126
2. Attach the loop end of the net to the
upper hook. Use one prong on the hook
for the net attachment.
E275125
3. Attach the bottom of the net to the
lower anchor point.
267
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
E275124
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side
of your vehicle.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly
distribute the load, as well as maintain
a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles,
with higher centers of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use our genuine accessory crossbars
designed specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
Maximum Recommended Load Amounts
Maximum Recommended LoadDescription
125 lb (56 kg)Vehicles with Moonroof
200 lb (90 kg)Vehicles without Moonroof
Note: The maximum recommended load
is based on the load being evenly distributed
on the crossbars.
Some Middle East (ME) Expedition
vehicles have a higher Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) rating and unique
capabilities. As a result, use the following
table to determine the appropriate loading
for Middle East market Expeditions -
excluding MAX, which uses the previous
table.
268
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
Roof Load
F GAWR
1
GVWDescription
0 lb (0 kg)3,550 lb (1,610 kg)7,720 lb (3,501 kg)ME Expedition 4WD
with and without
moonroof
200 lb (90 kg)3,375 lb (1,530 kg)7,450 lb (3,379 kg)ME Expedition
without moonroof
125 lb (56 kg)3,375 lb (1,530 kg)7,450 lb (3,379 kg)ME Expedition with
moonroof
1
Front Gross Axle Weight Ratio.
Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped)
Note: For less wind noise and better
aerodynamics, only install the crossbars
when you need them for carrying cargo. The
front crossbar is fixed. There are two
optional positions for the rear crossbar.
Follow the steps to reposition or remove the
rear crossbar.
E203063
1. Remove the crossbar bolts at both
sides of the rear crossbar by using the
supplied torx tool or a similar tool.
2. Move the crossbar to the new position.
3. Replace and tighten the bolts at both
sides of the crossbar by using the
supplied torx tool or a similar tool.
Note: There may be snap caps in the new
side rail position, which must be removed
before installing the crossbar. These caps
can be removed by using the supplied torx
tool or a similar tool.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
269
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING: The
appropriate loading capacity of
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the
vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
270
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight limits can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
271
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the
original tires because they may
lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating can
adversely affect the
performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
272
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: When loading
the roof racks, we recommend
you evenly distribute the load,
as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
273
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance,
when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
274
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and personal injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR
specified on the certification
label.
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 315).
Some vehicles may have the
ability to modify trailer towing
features. See Towing (page 275).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop and load
capacity. When both the
loaded vehicle and trailer are
connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
269).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
275
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER REVERSING AIDS (IF
EQUIPPED)
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
WARNING: This system is an extra
driving aid. It does not replace your
attention and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you
fail to press the brake pedal when
necessary, you may collide with another
vehicle.
Note: The system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices.
Note: You must always be aware of the
vehicle and trailer combination and the
surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or
prevent the vehicle or trailer from making
contact with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.
Note: Keep in mind that the front end of
the vehicle swings out when changing the
direction of the trailer.
Note: The system relies on user
measurements to determine sticker
placement and system limits. It is critical to
take the key measurements correctly.
Incorrect measurements can result in the
improper function of the system up to and
including contact between the vehicle and
trailer.
Note: The system limits vehicle speed when
backing up. The system is not a replacement
for proper use of the throttle and brake
pedals.
Principle of Operation
This feature helps you to steer your vehicle
when backing up with a trailer attached.
Turn and hold the control knob in the
direction you want the trailer to go and the
system takes over the steering. This allows
you to focus on checking the mirrors and
operating the brake and accelerator.
Each trailer you use with your vehicle has
to be setup once.
You must take care to follow the setup
process accurately, to make sure the
sticker is placed correctly.
Contact your dealership if you need
assistance in setting up your trailer.
Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
Note: Once you have entered a trailer's
information into the system, it is stored for
easy recall. A maximum of 10 trailers can be
added to the system.
276
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
Step 1: Position your Vehicle and Trailer
Hitch your conventional trailer to your
vehicle. See Essential Towing Checks
(page 289).
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
level surface.
For best results, make sure that your trailer
rides level with the ground when you hitch
it to your vehicle. More information on
selecting your towbar is available in the
Towing section. See Towing (page 275).
E247482
Make sure your vehicle and the trailer are
in line with each other. You can do this by
driving straight forward.
E247481
Step 2: Follow the Information Display
Prompts
Press the button to turn the system on.
E253721
1. Select the option to add a trailer in the
instrument cluster menu, using the
steering wheel control. See General
Information (page 114).
2. Add a personalized name for the trailer
using the screen prompts. Use the
down arrow to scroll to the desired
letter and then press the right arrow to
advance to the next letter. Press OK to
continue.
3. Select the type of trailer brake system
for the trailer you are adding.
4. Select the brake effort level for the
trailer.
Note: The default option is low. This is
recommended for most trailers. If the
trailer's brakes require more initial voltage,
or if you prefer more aggressive braking then
select the other options as required.
277
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
Some examples of conventional type
trailers are shown below.
Note: You cannot use the system with the
types of trailers marked with the cross.
The system only works with
conventional trailers. It does not work
with other types including gooseneck
and fifth wheel.
E209766
Follow the information display prompts.
Step 3: Place the Sticker on the Trailer
Frame
The supplied sticker must be placed in an
area visible by the rear view camera.
Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps
turn on automatically to improve visibility.
Note: An assistant can help to carry out the
following procedure.
Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct the
rear view camera's view of the sticker. For
example, items such as a jack handle or
wiring.
Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and
clean horizontal surface. For best results
apply the sticker when temperatures are
above 32°F (0°C).
Note: Do not move stickers after they are
placed. Do not re-use any stickers if
removed.
Note: Additional stickers may be purchased
through your Ford Dealers parts department.
E209805
Use the supplied measurement card, a
tape measure and pen to carefully mark
the area where to attach the sticker
(supplied in the back cover pocket of your
quick start guide). Make sure the whole
sticker is within the zone between the two
arcs or distance markers on the diagram,
and is also visible in the rear view camera
display.
Step 4: Take Measurements
After the sticker is correctly placed on the
trailer you must take some key
measurements.
Note: Accurate measurements must be
taken for the system to operate properly.
Note: When rounding in inches, round
upward if the measured length is a quarter
inch or greater. Round downward if the
measured length is less than a quarter inch.
For example 12.25 in (31.11 cm) would be
rounded up to 12.50 in (31.75 cm). 12.13 in
(30.8 cm) would be rounded down to
12.00 in (30.48 cm).
Note: When rounding in centimeters, round
to the nearest whole centimeter. If the
measurement is less than 0.2 in (0.5 cm)
round downward. If the measurement is
more than or equal to 0.2 in (0.5 cm) round
upward. For example, 11.9 in (30.3 cm)
would be rounded down to 11.8 in (30 cm).
12.0 in (30.5 cm) would be rounded up to
12.2 in (31 cm).
278
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: Use consistent metric or imperial
units as required by your country or vehicle.
Record the four key distances (A, B, C, D)
as required by the measurement card.
Record the trailer name for these
measurements.
E247545
Distance A
The horizontal distance from the bumper
to the center of the ball hitch on the trailer.
Distance B
The horizontal distance from the center of
the ball hitch to the center of the sticker.
Distance C
The distance from the rear view camera to
the center of the sticker.
Distance D
The horizontal distance from the bumper
to the center of the trailer axle (single axle
trailers), or the center of the axles (trailers
with dual axles or more).
Note: If the distance ends in anything less
than one half of an inch, round down to the
current whole inch. If a distance ends in one
half or greater of an inch, round up to the
next whole inch. For example, 12.3 in
(31.12 cm) would be rounded down to 12 in
(30.48 cm). 12.5 in (31.75 cm) would be
rounded up to 13 in (33 cm).
Step 5: Enter Measurements Using the
Information Display
Using the recorded measurements, enter
the required data into the system. Follow
the on screen prompts to enter each of the
measurements taken in step 4. When all
four distances have been entered, a
confirmation display appears. Check the
values are correct before proceeding, or go
back to change any if required.
Step 6: Confirming the Sticker Location
Check the rear view camera display to see
if the sticker is identified by the system and
marked with a red circle.
Confirm that the red circle is correctly
located over the sticker image in the
display. The on screen prompt asks you to
confirm this.
Note: If the system cannot locate the
sticker try cleaning the camera lens, and
also make sure the sticker is within the green
zone as indicated in step 3.
Calibrating the System
To complete setup, drive your vehicle
straight forward between 4 mph (6 km/h)
and 24 mph (39 km/h) following the on
screen prompt.
Note: Check your measurements to make
sure you measured from the correct points.
Note: If you move the steering wheel during
this procedure, the calibration pauses.
Note: We recommend that you do not do
this at night.
279
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
A message displays during calibration and
after calibration is complete.
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist
To use the system press the button and
select the required trailer from the display.
E253721
When the sticker is located, the display
prompts you to shift into reverse (R). The
system turns on.
Note: The system does not function if your
hands are on the steering wheel. Remove
your hands to resume operation.
Follow the screen prompts to steer your
vehicle and trailer.
Note: You may have to drive forward to
straighten the trailer.
Take your hands off the steering wheel and
turn the Pro Trailer Backup Assist control
knob instead. The knob acts as the steering
control for the trailer.
Note: The more you turn the knob, the
sharper the trailer turns.
E246992
Turn and hold counterclockwise to make
the trailer go left.
E246991
Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer
go right.
Note: Practice maneuvering with the
system in a safe open area first.
Note: Try backing up in a straight line and
then turning the knob slowly in the direction
you want to go.
Note: Quickly turning and releasing the
knob results in a jerky movement of the
vehicle.
280
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
E246993
Release the knob when the trailer is
moving in the direction you want. Control
the accelerator and brakes while the
system steers your vehicle automatically
to keep the trailer moving straight back.
Note: You may have to use the knob to
correct the trailer direction when attempting
to move the trailer straight back under some
conditions.
Note: Your vehicle speed is automatically
limited.
Note: When you release the knob or turn it
to the center position, your vehicle follows
the trailer's path.
Troubleshooting
Note: The system requires a clear view of
the sticker placed on the trailer. You must
keep the camera lens and sticker clean for
the system to operate correctly.
Setup
The system is designed to be used with a
wide variety of trailers. However there are
some trailers that do not have a proper
surface and location to mount the sticker.
These trailers are not supported. Attempts
to place the sticker on a surface that does
not meet the sticker placement
requirement listed in Step 3 of the setup
instruction or entering inaccurate
measurements to proceed through setup
can result in improper system function.
Accurate measurements are critical to
correct system function. If you need to
check measurements entered or change
them you can access them through the
trailer menus in the instrument cluster.
Choose the option to change the sticker
from the change trailer settings menu. It is
not necessary to remove the sticker if you
are just reviewing or changing
measurements.
The following menu warnings or difficulties
may occur during setup. Tips to resolve
them are listed below.
Note: If you still experience issues with the
system's ability to detect the sticker, see
the information in the next section regarding
sticker lost during system operation.
Measurement A has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• The system is designed to work with
drawbars that have a bumper to hitch
ball center measurement of 4 in
(10 cm) to 11 in (28 cm) when installed.
Do not attempt to use drawbars that
have a length outside this range as the
system performance degrades and
could cause improper system function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from bumper and the hitch ball center.
A straight line distance that includes
any vertical rise or drop increases the
measurement and makes it inaccurate.
Inaccurate measurements degrade
system performance and could cause
improper system function. See step 4
of the setup instruction to review
measurement instructions.
281
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
Measurement B has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the sticker placement
instruction in step 3 of the setup has
been followed. Stickers placed outside
the allowed zone adversely affect the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function.
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from center of sticker to the hitch ball
center. A straight line distance that
includes any vertical rise or drop
increases the measurement and
causes an inaccurate value to be
entered into the system. See step 4 of
the setup for additional measurement
instructions.
Measurement C has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the sticker placement
instructions in step 3 of the setup have
been followed. Stickers placed outside
the allowed zone adversely affect the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function. If you have
met all the criteria for sticker
placement and you see this message
this sticker is either too far below or too
close to the camera to properly
recognize the sticker. In order for the
system to operate correctly the sticker
height must be lowered if you receive
the minimum warning or the sticker
height must be raised if you receive the
maximum warning.
• Only one sticker can be placed on the
trailer for correct system function. The
previous sticker must be removed or
covered so only one sticker is visible to
the camera.
• Measurement B and C must be
measured again if a new sticker is
placed on the trailer.
Measurement D has reached maximum or
minimum value:
• Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from the bumper to the center of the
single axle or the center of all the axles
on the trailer. See step 4 of the setup
for additional measurement
instructions. The TBA system does not
support trailer lengths outside the
range allowed by the information
display.
System is circling something beside the
sticker or system cannot find the sticker:
• Make sure the rear camera is clean and
the sticker is clearly visible in the
camera image. Clean the camera and
sticker if necessary.
• The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the
sticker. Inaccurate sticker
measurements degrade the system’s
ability to locate the sticker. Verify the
measurements entered into the system
are accurate.
• Remove the incorrectly circled label or
decal if possible.
• If you cannot resolve the issue a new
sticker location should be tried. The
sticker location must still meet the
requirements noted in step 3 of the
setup instructions. Only one sticker can
be placed on the trailer for correct
system function. The previous sticker
must be removed or covered so only
one sticker is visible to the camera.
Calibration
The system monitors various vehicle
parameters to ensure your vehicle is being
driven straight and the trailer straight
behind your vehicle. Any steering input or
trailer movement pauses the calibration.
282
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
For best results:
• Use a long, straight, smooth and level
road when attempting to calibrate.
• Drive straight forward.
• Drive between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
24 mph (39 km/h).
System Operation
The following warnings or difficulties may
occur during feature operation. Tips to
resolve them are listed below.
The system is not available:
• The system relies on many
sub-systems in your vehicle to operate
correctly. If those sub-systems are not
operating correctly the system may not
be available.
• Low battery voltage is a condition
which prevents the system from
operating. Please make sure the
battery is correctly charged if the
system is not available.
• You may need to drive your vehicle
straight forward above 25 mph
(40 km/h) before the system is
available again.
• If the message still displays take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.
Sticker lost:
• If the system cannot initially find the
sticker, it may be necessary for you to
change the lighting conditions by
moving the vehicle and trailer or
waiting until conditions change.
• Check for the following if you receive
the lost sticker message while using
the system.
• Stop your vehicle as soon as the
message displays.
• Make sure the sticker is visible and the
pattern is discernable in the rear view
camera image.
• Clean the sticker and camera to make
sure they are unobstructed.
• Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free
cloth and water.
• Clean the sticker with isopropyl rubbing
alcohol sprayed directly onto the
sticker, and then wipe clean with a soft
cloth.
• Remove any items that may be
blocking the view of the sticker.
Depending on your trailer configuration
and any equipment mounted to your
trailer it is possible for the sticker to be
blocked from view of the camera as it
rotates on the hitch ball but not be
blocked during setup. Remove the
obstruction if possible. It is necessary
to remove the sticker from its current
location if the obstruction cannot be
cleared and place a new sticker that is
visible to the camera in all positions of
the trailer behind your vehicle.
• Placing the sticker on a surface angled
away from the vehicle reduces
performance. Use a drawbar that
positions the trailer level to the ground
when attached to vehicle. This typically
provides a level surface to mount the
sticker. Place the sticker on a bracket
or other object when no level surface
is available.
• Make sure the entire sticker is on a flat
surface that is completely visible to the
camera. Do not fold the sticker over an
edge on the trailer frame. This can
degrade performance.
• Shadows on the sticker may effect
tracking performance under some
lighting conditions. Moving the sticker
to another location within the allowed
placement area may improve
performance. Use the change sticker
option in your Towing menu if you
move the sticker.
283
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
• You can change your sticker location
by going into the Towing menu,
selecting trailer options, selecting
change trailer settings and then
selecting the change sticker option. The
previous sticker must be removed.
ONLY ONE STICKER SHOULD BE
PLACED ON THE TRAILER FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM FUNCTION.
• The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the
sticker. Inaccurate measurements
reduce the system’s ability to locate
the sticker. Check the measurements
entered into the system are correct.
Refer to the step 4 of Pro trailer backup
Assist setup for instructions on
measurements.
• You can change your measurement by
going into the Towing menu, selecting
trailer options, selecting change trailer
setting and then selecting the change
sticker option. Disregard the prompt to
remove this sticker and continue to the
next step if you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker
location.
System does not backup straight:
• Factors such as the drawbar
connection to the hitch receiver, road
camber, road grade and compliance in
the trailer suspension can influence
how straight the system is able to back
your trailer when the knob is not turned.
You can compensate for the trailer
drifting to the right or left by slowly
turning the Pro Trailer Backup Assist
knob until the trailer is following your
desired path and then holding the knob
in that position. If you would like to
recalibrate the system for straight
backing, you can do so with the
following procedure.
• Go into the Towing menu, select trailer
options, select change trailer setting
and then select the change sticker
option. Your saved measurements
display. Do not change them but
continue to confirm measurements.
Once you confirm the measurements,
the system prompts you to perform the
calibration procedure.
System consistently shows Stop Now Max
trailer angle reached warning:
• The system uses your measurements
to determine sticker position and
establish system limits. Accurate
sticker placement and trailer
measurements provide the best
system performance. If you are
consistently receiving this warning it is
likely there is an issue with sticker
placement or the entered
measurements. Make sure that the
284
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
sticker is placed correctly based on
steps 3 and the measurements were
made correctly according to Step 4.
The troubleshooting guide for trailer
measurements can also be reviewed
for help in making measurements.
• To change sticker location or change
trailer measurements, go into the
Towing menu, select trailer options,
select change trailer setting and then
select the change sticker option.
• If the sticker location needs to be
changed, the previous sticker must be
removed and a new sticker needs to
be placed on the trailer. ONLY ONE
STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED ON
THE TRAILER FOR PROPER
SYSTEM FUNCTION.
• Disregard the prompt to remove this
sticker and continue to the next step if
you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker
location.
System consistently shows Stop now take
control of steering warning:
• The system displays this warning when
it can no longer steer the vehicle and
you must take over steering. There are
four reasons why this warning displays
and additional information regarding
the reason for the warning is available
on the center display.
• The steering wheel is touched while
the system is controlling it. Avoid
touching the wheel during system
operation.
• The maximum speed for feature
operation is exceeded. System
performance is optimized at slower
speeds. Backup slowly.
• The sticker was lost by the camera
system. Once your vehicle is stopped
additional warnings indicate the sticker
was lost. Refer to sticker lost trouble
shooting tips.
• An internal condition for system
operation was not met which requires
your vehicle return to manual control
of the steering.
Note: The system is designed to be used
with the same trailer connection every time
the trailer is chosen from the selection
menu. Using a different drawbar or a
different pin hole (on drawbars with more
than one) when connecting the drawbar to
your vehicle affects the trailer
measurements. Take the measurements
again and update if required.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of
vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Ford does not recommend disabling this
feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (such as
hill climbing), the driver has significant
trailer towing experience, and can control
trailer sway and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
285
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED appears in the information display.
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the
road and check for proper tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See Towing (page
275).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
that follows.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 55 ft² (5.11 m²) if
your vehicle has the standard
towing package, or 60 ft² (5.57 m²)
if your vehicle has the heavy duty
package.
Note: Your vehicle could have
reduced performance when
operating at high altitudes and
when heavily loaded or towing a
trailer. When driving at elevation,
to match driving performance as
perceived at sea level, reduce gross
vehicle weight and gross
combination weight by 2% per
1,000 ft (300 m) of elevation.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. This specified
weight could limit the maximum
trailer weights, as the vehicle’s
electrical system may not include
the wiring connector needed to
activate electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
chart that follows.
To calculate the maximum loaded
trailer weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio. See the
chart that follows.
2. Subtract all of the following
that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight.
• Hitch hardware weight, such
as a draw bar, ball, locks or
weight distributing.
• Driver weight.
• Passenger weight.
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight.
• Aftermarket equipment
weight.
3. This equals the maximum
loaded trailer weight for this
combination.
286
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: The trailer tongue load
figures into the payload for your
vehicle. Reduce the total payload
by the final trailer tongue weight.
Consult an authorized dealer to
determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum Gross
Combined Weight
Ratio
Axle
Ratio
Towing
Package
Vehicle
Type
6,000 lb
(2,722 kg)
12,000 lb (5,443 kg)3.15
Standard
Short
Wheel-
base 4x2
6,000 lb
(2,722 kg)
12,000 lb (5,443 kg)
3.31
6,000 lb
(2,722 kg)
12,100 lb (5,488 kg)
Short
Wheel-
base 4x4
6,000 lb
(2,722 kg)
12,300 lb (5,579 kg)
6,300 lb
(2,858 kg)
12,500 lb (5,670 kg)
Long
Wheel-
base 4x2
6,000 lb
(2,722 kg)
12,400 lb (5,625 kg)
Long
Wheel-
base 4x4
6,000 lb
(2,722 kg)
12,300 lb (5,579 kg)
3.73
Short
Wheel-
base 4x4
6,000 lb
(2,722 kg)
12,400 lb (5,625 kg)
Long
Wheel-
base 4x4
287
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
Maximum
Trailer
Weight
Maximum Gross
Combined Weight
Ratio
Axle
Ratio
Towing
Package
Vehicle
Type
9,300 lb
(4,218 kg)
15,300 lb (6,940 kg)
3.73
Optional
Heavy
Duty with
50%
Load
Distrib-
uting -
Front
Axle Load
Restora-
tion
Short
Wheel-
base 4x2
9,200 lb
(4,173 kg)
15,500 lb (7,031 kg)
Short
Wheel-
base 4x4
9,000 lb
(4,082 kg)
15,200 lb (6,895 kg)
Long
Wheel-
base 4x2
9,000 lb
(4,082 kg)
15,500 lb (7,031 kg)
Long
Wheel-
base 4x4
288
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
For load specification terms found on the
tire label and Safety Compliance label and
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load, See Load Limit (page 269).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector
(Vehicles with a Trailer Towing
Package and 7–Pin Connector)
E163167
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left direction indicator and
stop lamp
Yellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right direction indicator and
stop lamp
Green
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
Trailer Hitch Cover
Your vehicle has a removable trailer hitch
cover. To remove the trailer hitch cover:
E268259
1. Grab the trailer hitch cover at the
bottom and pull towards the rear of
the vehicle until the bottom of the
trailer hitch cover unsnaps from the
bumper.
289
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
2. Grab the trailer hitch cover at the edge
and rotate until the top of the trailer
hitch cover unsnaps from the bumper,
then remove the trailer hitch cover.
To install the trailer hitch cover:
E268260
1. Line up the snaps on the trailer hitch
cover to the holes on the bumper and
push forward until it snaps into place.
Hitches
WARNING: Do not cut, drill, weld
or modify the trailer hitch. Modifying the
trailer hitch could reduce the hitch rating.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Integrated Hitch Rating
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond
the maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
The standard integrated hitch has two
ratings depending on mode of operation:
• Weight-carrying mode requires a draw
bar and hitch ball. The draw bar
supports all the vertical tongue load of
the trailer.
• Weight-distributing mode requires an
aftermarket weight-distributing
system, which includes draw bar, hitch
ball, spring bars and snap-up brackets.
This system distributes the vertical
tongue load of the trailer between the
truck and the trailer.
You must use a weight-distributing hitch
for weights above 6,000 lb (2,721 kg), up
to your vehicle's maximum towing
capacity.
Note: These are hitch ratings only. Actual
vehicle ratings are dependent on engine,
transmission and axle combinations.
Weight-distributing Hitch
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring
bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper
is higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may
cause unpredictable handling, and could
result in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
290
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
half the way down from H2, toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat steps 2-6.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper. Always connect the safety chains
to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer
hitch.
Install trailer safety chains to the trailer
hitch as recommended by the
manufacturer. Cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
E265060
If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch,
make sure the latch fully closes.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a
trailer's hydraulic brake system directly
to your vehicle's brake system. Your
vehicle may not have enough braking
power and your chances of having a
collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1,500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
291
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Use the integrated
trailer brake controller to properly adjust
the trailer brakes and check all
connections before towing a trailer.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
E183395
When used properly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
The controller user interface consists of
the following:
A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Pressing these buttons adjusts the
controller's power output to the trailer
brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
braking). The gain setting displays in the
message center.
The controller shows gain setting, output
bar graph, and trailer connectivity status
in the information display. They appear in
the information display as follows:
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain (without
trailer connected): Shows the current
gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control
lever or make gain adjustments with
no trailer connected.
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain Output:
Displays when you push your vehicle's
brake pedal, or upon use of the manual
control. Bar indicators illuminate in the
information display to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer
brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates
the least amount of output; six bars
indicate maximum output.
• Trailer Connected: Displays when the
system senses a correct trailer wiring
connection (a trailer with electric trailer
brakes) during a given ignition cycle.
• Trailer Disconnected: Displays,
accompanied by a single audible time,
when the system senses a trailer
connection and then a disconnection,
either intentional or unintentional,
during a given ignition cycle. It also
displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault
occurs causing the trailer to appear
disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control
lever without a trailer connected. After
disconnecting the trailer connector,
press the brake pedal for
approximately five seconds to allow
the system to detect and update the
trailer status.
292
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to turn on the trailer's
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. If you use the manual control
when the brake is also applied, the greater
of the two inputs determines the power
sent to the trailer brakes.
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control
lever illuminates both the trailer brake
lamps and your vehicle brake lamps
except the center high-mount stop
lamp, if you make the proper electrical
connection to the trailer. Pressing your
vehicle brake pedal also illuminates
both trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance when
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a
message confirming connection
appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)
buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the gain setting. Repeat steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Explanation of Information Display
Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
However, your warranty does not cover this
diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
A message indicating a trailer brake
module fault may display in response to
faults sensed by the trailer brake controller,
accompanied by a single tone. If this
message appears, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis
and repair. The controller may still
function, but performance may be
degraded.
A message indicating a trailer wiring fault
may display when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If this
message displays, accompanied by a
single tone, with no trailer connected, the
problem is with your vehicle wiring
between the trailer brake controller and
the 7-pin connector at the bumper. If the
message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer
293
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground
such as a chaffed wire, short to voltage
such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery, or the trailer brakes
may be drawing too much current.
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
• Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather and
trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from when the gain was initially
set.
• Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
• The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
• Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brakes whether you attach a
trailer or not.
• When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down. The
controller module and display turn on
when you switch the ignition on.
• The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed
item. We are not responsible for
warranty or performance of the
controller due to misuse or customer
installation.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any
trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail
lamp wiring; this may damage the
electrical system resulting in fire. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible for assistance in proper trailer
tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, direction indicators and hazard lights
are working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
294
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine
and transmission cooling and to help
A/C performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
slopes.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed when towing may reduce
this tendency.
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant if the axle is not already
filled with it. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 380).
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a slope. However, if
you must park on a slope:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the transmission in park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not
included with your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
temporary spare tire is different in size,
tread-type, or is from a different
manufacturer than the road tires on your
vehicle. Consult information on the tire
label or Safety Compliance label for
limitations when using these tires.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions and
reliability.
295
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or another axle repair is
required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the
ignition is in the accessory or on position
when being towed.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 139).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, for example towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines prevent damage to your
transmission.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles
You cannot tow a two wheel drive vehicle
with any wheels on the ground as vehicle
or transmission damage may occur. You
must tow your vehicle with all four wheels
off the ground, for example when using a
car-hauling trailer.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Without 4x4
LOW
If your vehicle is not equipped with 4x4
Low, you cannot tow your vehicle with any
wheels on the ground or vehicle damage
may occur. You must tow your vehicle with
all four wheels off the ground, for example
when using a car-hauling trailer.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles With 4x4
LOW
You can only tow a 4X4 LOW equipped
four-wheel drive vehicle with all wheels on
the ground by placing the transfer case in
its neutral position and engaging the four
wheel down towing feature. Perform the
steps outlined in the following section after
positioning your vehicle behind the tow
vehicle and properly securing them
together.
Four-wheel-down Towing
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display shows Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral.
This indicates that your vehicle is safe to
tow with all wheels on the ground.
Note: If you do not see the message in the
information display, you must perform the
procedure again from the beginning.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.
Entering Four-wheel-down Towing
1. Start your vehicle.
2. Select 2H on the 4WD mode selector
switch.
3. For vehicles equipped with a console
shifter, place the transmission in stay
in neutral mode. See Automatic
Transmission (page 193). For vehicles
equipped with a column shifter, place
the transmission in neutral (N).
4. Once the transmission is in neutral (N)
or stay in neutral mode, switch the
engine off but leave the ignition in the
on position. The information display
shows a Transmission Not in Park
message.
296
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: If your vehicle has intelligent access,
you can keep your vehicle on while switching
the engine off by pressing the
START/STOP button two times slowly
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Enable neutral tow through the
information display by selecting
Settings from the menu. See General
Information (page 114).
7. Then select Advanced Settings.
8. Then select Vehicle.
9. Then select Neutral Tow.
10. Press and hold the OK button until
the information display confirms
neutral tow is enabled.
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display shows Neutral Tow
Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral.
This indicates that your vehicle is safe to
tow with all wheels on the ground.
Note: If you do not see the message in the
display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts into its neutral position.
This is normal.
11. Leave the transmission in neutral (N).
If your vehicle has intelligent access,
press the engine START/STOP
button once without pressing the
brake pedal to switch the ignition off.
You do not need to leave your keys in
the vehicle. You can lock and unlock
your vehicle as you normally do. If
your vehicle has a physical ignition
key, turn the ignition as far as it can
go toward the off position. It does not
turn to the off position when the
transmission is in neutral (N). You
must leave the key in the ignition
when towing. To lock and unlock your
vehicle, use the keyless entry keypad
or an extra set of keys.
12. Release the brake pedal.
WARNING: Do not disconnect the
battery during recreational towing. It
prevents the transfer case from shifting
properly and may cause the vehicle to
roll, even if the transmission is in park
(P).
WARNING: Shifting the transfer
case to its neutral position for
recreational towing may cause the
vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is
in park (P). It may injure the driver and
others. Make sure you press the foot
brake and the vehicle is in a secure, safe
position when you shift to neutral (N).
Note: Failing to put the transfer case in its
neutral position may damage vehicle
components.
Note: You can check four-wheel-down
towing status at any time by opening the
driver door or turning the ignition to the
accessory or on position and verifying the
message displays in the cluster.
Exiting Four-wheel-down Towing
To exit four-wheel-down towing and return
the transfer case to its 2H position:
1. With your vehicle still properly secured
to the tow vehicle, start the engine.
2. After starting your vehicle, switch the
engine off but leave the key in the on
position.
Note: If your vehicle has intelligent access,
you can keep the vehicle on when switching
the engine off by pressing the
START/STOP button two times slowly
without pressing the brake pedal.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transmission out of neutral
(N) and into park (P).
5. Release the brake pedal.
297
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 4X2, and
Neutral Tow Disabled.
Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
Note: If Shift Delayed Pull Forward
appears in the instrument cluster, transfer
case gear tooth blockage is present. See the
instructions after this section.
6. Apply the parking brake, then
disconnect your vehicle from the tow
vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake, start the
engine and shift the transmission to
drive (D) to make sure the transfer
case is out neutral (N).
8. If the transfer case does not
successfully shift out of neutral (N),
set the parking brake until you can have
your vehicle serviced.
Resolving the Shift Delayed Pull
Forward Message
If the instrument cluster displays Shift
Delayed Pull Forward, perform the
following:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Put the transmission into neutral (N),
then start the engine.
3. With the engine running, shift the
transmission to drive (D) and let the
vehicle roll forward up to 3 ft (1 m). You
may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
4. Make sure the instrument cluster
displays Neutral Tow Disabled.
298
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Towing
REDUCED ENGINE
PERFORMANCE
WARNING: If you continue to drive
your vehicle when the engine is
overheating, the engine could stop
without warning. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position,
the engine is overheating. See Gauges
(page 107).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on
ambient temperature, vehicle load and
terrain. The engine continues to operate
with limited power for a short period of
time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine reduces. The
air conditioning switches off and the engine
cooling fan operates continually.
1. Gradually reduce your speed and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Immediately switch the engine off to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 329).
5. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back
home).
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want
to avoid doing because they reduce your
fuel economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
299
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through
flowing or deep water as you may lose
control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat
designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
area. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot
move freely can cause loss of vehicle
control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
300
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
WARNING: Secure the floor mat
to both retention devices so that it
cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top
of the original floor mats. This could
result in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot
well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped
under the pedals causing a loss of
vehicle control.
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
301
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period supplied with
your vehicle.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the Owner's Manual kit.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
302
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside
coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the button again to switch them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or
death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
303
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Note: To avoid reverse polarity connections,
make sure that you correctly identify the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
both the disabled and booster vehicles
before connecting the cables. Stay clear of
moving parts.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the
negative jumper cable to any other part
of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
Note: Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+) terminal of
your vehicle’s battery. High current may flow
through and cause damage to the fuses.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
304
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
E274083
E213994
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
305
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
E320800
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
306
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by
any other means, vehicle damage may
occur.
We produce a towing manual for all
authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes inoperable without
access to wheel dollies, a car-hauling
trailer or a flatbed transport vehicle, you
can flat-tow with all wheels on the ground
under limited conditions. See Towing the
Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 296).
TOWING POINTS
WARNING: Using recovery hooks
is dangerous and should only be done by
a person familiar with proper vehicle
recovery safety practices. Improper use
of recovery hooks may cause hook failure
or separation from the vehicle and could
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Always slowly remove
the slack from the recovery strap prior
to pulling. Failure to do so can introduce
significantly higher loads which can
cause the recovery hooks to break off, or
the recovery strap to fail which can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never link two straps
together with a clevis pin. These heavy
metal objects could become projectiles
if the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with
frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load
applied to them greater than the gross
vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
307
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
If your vehicle is configured as a
motorhome please call 1-800-444-3311
for support.
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-888-658-6805)
Website
www.ford.ca
Facebook
FordServiceCA (English)
FordServiceQC (Français)
Twitter
@FordServiceCA
308
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
309
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
For additional information refer to the
Better Business Bureau website.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
310
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
311
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhone
Customer Relation-
ship Center
apemcrc@ford.comN/AN/AAsia Pacific
atnclien@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Caribbean and
Central America
menacac@ford.com971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
Kuwait
22280384
nafcrc@ford.comN/AN/ANorth Africa
atnclien@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands
ssacrc@ford.comN/AN/ASub-Saharan Africa
infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
312
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
313
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Website
1-800-333-0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1-800-565-3673Phone
314
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Customer Assistance
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect your vehicle’s main electrical
systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you need to reset some features.
See Changing the 12V Battery (page 335).
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
The fuse box is in the passenger
compartment under the dashboard. You
may need to remove a trim panel to access
the box.
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
The engine compartment fuse box is in the
engine compartment. It has high-current
fuses that protect your vehicle's main
electrical systems from overloads.
Some features need to be reset when you
or someone else disconnects and
reconnects the battery. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 335).
Replace fuses with the same type and
rating. See Changing a Fuse (page 323).
315
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuses
E251921
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Number
Horn.25A1
Fan 1.50A2
Front wiper motor.30A3
Inverter.50A4
Starter relay.30A5
Power point 1.20A6
Power point 2.20A8
Rain sensor.5A10
Trailer tow light module.20A12
4x4 module.10A13
316
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Number
Heated backlight relay coil.
Heated mirror relay coil.
Heated wiper park relay coil.
Transmission isolation relay coil.
Not used (spare).15A14
Voltage quality module run/start power.15A15
Blindspot information system.
Image processing module B.
Front view camera.
Rear view camera.
Cruise control module.
Powertrain control module run/start feed.10A16
Anti-lock brake system run/start feed.10A17
Electronic power assist steering run/start feed.10A18
Not used.—19
Front blower.40A20
Passenger seat motors.40A21
Not used.—22
Alternator A-line.10A23
Trailer brake control module.30A24
Body control module power 1.50A25
Electronic fan 3.50A26
Driver seat motors.40A27
Rear heated seats.15A28
Rear seat climate control module.
Integrated wheel end solenoid.10A29
Trailer tow class II-IV battery charge.25A30
Power folding seat module.50A31
A/C clutch.10A32
Not used.—33
317
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Number
Not used.—34
Vehicle power 4.20A35
Vehicle power 3.10A36
Vehicle power 2.25A37
Vehicle power 1.25A38
Not used.—39
Not used.—41
Not used.—43
Front and rear washer pump.20A45
Family entertainment system.7.5A46
Not used.—47
Not used.—48
Not used.—49
Fuel pump.30A50
Power point 3.20A51
Body control module voltage quality module.50A52
Trailer tow park lamps relay.25A53
Trailer tow control module.
Electronic limited slip differential relay.40A54
Auxiliary blower.40A55
Power point 4.20A56
Not used (spare).5A58
Not used.—59
Not used (spare).5A60
Not used (spare).25A61
Not used (spare).25A62
4x4 module.25A63
318
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Number
Not used.—64
Not used.—65
Not used.—66
Not used.—67
Power liftgate module.30A69
Anti-lock brake system and parking brake module.40A70
4x4 module.25A71
Not used.—72
Not used.—73
Trailer tow backup lamps.10A74
Not used.—75
Body control module power 2.50A76
Climate control seat module.30A77
Not used.—78
Not used.—79
Heated wiper park.10A80
Not used.—81
Not used.—82
Not used (spare).15A83
Not used.—84
Not used.—85
USB smart charger 5.5A86
USB smart charger 3.5A87
Multi-contour seats relay.10A88
Power running boards.40A89
Not used.—91
319
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Number
Heated mirrors.15A93
USB smart charger 1.5A94
USB smart charger 2.10A95
Rear wiper motor relay.30A96
Not used (spare).40A97
Transmission oil pump.15A98
Heated backlight.40A99
Power point 5.20A100
Fan 2.25A101
Not used.—102
Not used.—103
Not used.—104
Not used.—105
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
Protected ComponentRelay
Number
Powertrain control module.R02
Electric fan 2.R05
320
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
E145984
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Number
Not used.—1
Driver seat switch.10A2
Driver door unlock.7.5A3
Speaker amplifier.20A4
Not used.—5
Smart datalink connector logic.10A6
Rear audio control module.10A7
Wireless accessory charger.5A8
Hands-free liftgate module.
Keypad.5A9
Combined sensor module.
Not used.—10
Not used.—11
Instrument cluster.7.5A12
321
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Number
Steering column control module.7.5A13
Smart datalink connector logic.
Brake switch.15A14
SYNC.15A15
Not used.—16
Not used.—17
Key inhibit solenoid.7.5A18
Gearshift module.
Telematics control unit module.5A19
Ignition switch.5A20
Humidity and in-car temperature sensor.5A21
Electrochromic mirror.5A22
Second row heated seat module.
Power window switch.30A23
Power mirror switch.
Left-hand front door zone module.
Moonroof logic.30A24
Speaker amplifier 2.20A25
Right-hand front door zone module.30A26
Left-hand rear door zone module.30A27
Right-hand rear door zone module.30A28
Adjustable pedals.15A29
Trailer tow control module.5A30
Rear climate control module.10A31
Drive mode switch module.
Terrain management switch.
Radio frequency transceiver module.
4x4 switch.
Audio control module.20A32
Not used.—33
322
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse
Number
Run/start relay.30A34
Not used (spare).5A35
Image processing module A.15A36
Automated park assist module.
Continuous control damping module.
Heated steering wheel.20A37
Left-hand rear power window.30A Circuit
Breaker
38
Right-hand rear power window.
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe
wire damage and could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
323
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuses
Fuse Types
E267379
Micro 2.A
Micro 3.B
Maxi.C
Mini.D
M Case.E
J Case.F
J Case Low Profile.G
Slotted M Case.H
324
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left hand side
of the instrument panel.
E166491
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
locate the secondary release lever
under the front of the hood near the
center of your vehicle.
325
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
E190266
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders
hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it is properly closed and fully
latched.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
E258054
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 338).A.
Power distribution box. See Changing a Fuse (page 323).B.
326
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 335).C.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 327).D.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 327).E.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 334).F.
Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 329).G.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 329).H.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 325).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 326).
7. Reinstall the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 327).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 384).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
327
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 326).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 384). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
328
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Action and descriptionMessage
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 380).
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 475).
E248801
1. Release the two clamps that secure
the cover to the air filter housing. Push
the air filter cover toward the front of
the vehicle and up slightly to release it.
2. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
3. Install the new air filter element.
E248800
4. Replace the air filter housing cover and
secure all the clamps. Be careful not
to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover
and ensure that you properly align the
tabs on the edge into the slots.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in
the windshield washer reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
329
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid
can come out forcefully when you loosen
the cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 475).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is on or the
cooling system is hot. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in
the engine coolant reservoir.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 380). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 380).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
330
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
380).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the
hard stop.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
331
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 380).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
use during emergencies only. Operate
your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
to rest in a safe location and seek
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, your vehicle will have limited
power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
332
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the
vehicle may not be able to accelerate
with full power until the coolant
temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. If the
temperature does not drop after
several minutes, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
If required, have an authorized dealer check
and change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 475).
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
333
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission
does not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID
CHECK (IF EQUIPPED)
E170444
3
1. Clean the area around the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug.
3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level
should be within 0.20 in (5 mm) from
the bottom of the hole.
4. Add fluid through the filler opening. Fill
to the bottom of the opening.
Use only fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 380).
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid
other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
of vehicle control, serious personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid
from a sealed container. Contamination
with dirt, water, petroleum products or
other materials may result in brake
system damage or failure. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in the
loss of vehicle control, serious personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
to touch your skin or eyes. If this
happens, rinse the affected areas
immediately with plenty of water and
contact your physician.
WARNING: The brake system
could be affected if the brake fluid level
is below the MIN mark or above the MAX
mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
334
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
E170684
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface.
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see
where the brake fluid level is relative
to the MIN and the MAX marks on the
reservoir.
Note: If the brake fluid level is between the
MIN and the MAX marks on the reservoir, it
is acceptable.
Note: If the brake fluid level is below the
MIN mark or above the MAX mark, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully
tight, unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 380).
Brake Fluid Service Interval
Brake fluid absorbs water over time which
degrades the effectiveness of the brake
fluid. Change the brake fluid at the
specified intervals to prevent degraded
braking performance.
For detailed interval information, see
Scheduled Maintenance in your Owner's
Manual or your local maintenance guide.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in
personal injury and damage to the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a
battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
335
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands
after handling.
WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery
does not disconnect your vehicle
electrical system. Make sure you
disconnect the battery cables from all
batteries when disconnecting power.
Failure to do so may cause serious
personal injury or property damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required,
you must use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
vent tube, battery cover or shield.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. Reset the
power windows bounce-back feature.
See Windows and Mirrors (page 101).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 398).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
to completely relearn the idle trim and
fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
336
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery
protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident,
contact an authorized dealer to check and
realign your headlamps.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 feet (7.6 meters).C
Horizontal reference line.D
337
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a 3 mm
circle on the lens) to the ground and
mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
so no light hits the wall.
E167358
4. For halogen or LED headlamps: On
the wall or screen you will observe a
light pattern with a distinct horizontal
edge toward the right. If this edge is not
at the horizontal reference line, you will
need to adjust the beam so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal
reference line.
E248807
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips
screwdriver to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid
with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk
of injury or accident.
338
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
our specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 380).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
2
E295620
2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.
339
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
3. Press the wiper blade secondary
locking clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
The bumper fascia and grille must be
removed in order to remove the headlamp
assembly, see an authorized dealer if your
headlamp assembly need replacement.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNING: Bulbs can become hot.
Let the bulb cool down before removing
it. Failure to do so could result in
personal injury.
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,
clean it with rubbing alcohol before
installing it.
LED Headlamp (If Equipped)
These lamps are LED, contact an
authorized dealer.
LED Foglamp (If Equipped)
These lamps are LED, contact an
authorized dealer.
Headlamp Bulb
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
E248888
2. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Front Direction Indicator Bulb
E248887
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
340
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
LED Direction Indicator and Side
Marker Bulbs (If Equipped)
These lamps are LED, contact an
authorized dealer.
Fog Lamp Bulb (If Equipped)
E163826
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Rear Lamp, Brake Lamp, Rear
Direction Indicator and Reverse
Lamp Bulbs
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
E249669
2. Carefully remove the cover.
E248886
4. Remove the retaining bolts from the
lamp assembly.
5. Remove the lamp assembly.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
341
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
E248889
Reverse lamp bulb.A.
Rear lamp, brake lamp and
direction indicator bulb.
B.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
LED Bulbs (If Equipped)
Note: Vehicles with LED headlamps do not
contain serviceable bulbs. See an authorized
dealer if they fail.
These lamps operate at a high voltage.
Contact an authorized dealer.
• Rear lamp.
• Brake lamp.
• Rear direction indicator.
• Side direction indicator.
• Reverse lamp.
• Central high-mounted brake lamp.
• License plate lamp.
342
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
343
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces
immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
344
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
remove the cover before application of
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser.
Immediately rinse away any over spray.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
345
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the
side airbag system and affect
performance of the side airbag in a crash.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
Mirrors
Do not clean the housing or glass of any
mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or
instrument panel to avoid contamination
of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 347).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
346
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF
EQUIPPED)
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
347
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Read the instructions before using cleaning
products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
348
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast
idle with the climate controls set to
defrost until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if you disconnect the battery
cables.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
349
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
350
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. If you intend to change the size of
the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 353).
You can find the recommended tire
inflation pressures can on the Tire Label,
which is on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver door. You can also find this
information on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door latch post;
next to the driver seating position.
We strongly recommend maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the
pressure to the highest value given for your
vehicle and tire size combination.
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
351
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive,
when selected, has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 200). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 325). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive when the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.
In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there
is a significant difference between the size
of a spare and the remaining tires,
four-wheel drive functionality may be
limited. See Using Four-Wheel Drive
(page 200).
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded
condition. These differences that make
your vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
352
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires us to give
you the following information
about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
353
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-Metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
354
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
355
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
81 (130)M
87 (140)N
99 (159)Q
106 (171)R
112 (180)S
118 (190)T
124 (200)U
130 (210)H
149 (240)V
356
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
168 (270)W
186 (299)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph
(299 km/h), tire manufacturers
always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards.
The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent
the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers
317 mean the 31st week of 1997.
After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear: The treadwear
grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100.
357
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
358
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
359
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
See Load Carrying (page 265).
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by us.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. We
recommend the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation
is the most common cause of
tire failures and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle
control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the our
recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum
inflation pressure information
found on the tire. Our
recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
360
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Tire Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of the vehicle. If you do not
maintain the inflation pressure at
the levels specified by us, your
vehicle may experience a condition
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a
severe vibration and oscillation in
the steering wheel after the vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road that does not dampen out by
itself. Shimmy may result from
significant under-inflation of the
tires, improper tires (load range,
size, or type), or vehicle
modifications such as lift-kits. In
the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should
slowly reduce speed by either lifting
off the accelerator pedal or lightly
applying the brakes. The shimmy
will cease as the vehicle speed
decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
361
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for
a description. Store and maintain
at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size
and dissimilar spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a
description. Store and maintain at
the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
362
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to one sixteenth of
an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade
over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
WARNING: In general, tires
should be replaced after six
years regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the
aging process and may require
tires to be replaced more
frequently.
363
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: You should
replace your spare tire when you
replace the road tires or after six
years due to aging even if it has
not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels
that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the
Tire Label which is located on
the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver's door. If this information
is not found on these labels, then
you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
364
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To reduce the
risk of serious injury, when
mounting replacement tires and
wheels, you should not exceed
the maximum pressure indicated
on the sidewall of the tire to set
the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
WARNING: When inflating
the tire for mounting pressures
up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on
the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
• Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
• Use both eye and ear
protection.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate
steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a
pair, except if the vehicle is
equipped with four wheel drive.
Vehicles equipped with four wheel
drive should have all four tires
replaced simultaneously.
Unevenly worn tires, mismatched
makes, models or brands can be
different in size, resulting in
potential damage to the four
wheel drive system.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels are not designed to
be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by us may affect
the operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
365
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle
is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do
not rapidly spin the tires;
spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A
tire can explode in as little as
three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and
injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
366
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label
shows different tire pressures for
the front and rear tires and the
vehicle has a tire pressure
monitoring system, then you
need to update the settings for
the system sensors. Always
perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If
you do not reset the system, it
may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when
necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life.
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram)
E142548
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the
same size, load index and speed rating
as those originally provided by Ford. Use
of any tire or wheel not recommended
by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels can
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
Follow the Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure found on the Safety
367
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Compliance Certification Label (on the
door hinge pillar, door latch post or the
door edge that meets the door latch
post, next to the driver seat), or Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only cable type chains or chains
offered by Ford/Lincoln as an
accessory or equivalent. Other
conventional link type chains may
contact and cause damage to the
vehicle's wheel house and/or body.
• Do not install chains on the front tires
as this may interfere with suspension
components.
• Only certain snow cables or chains
have been approved by Ford/Lincoln
as safe for use on your vehicle with the
following tires: 265/70R17 and
275/65R18.
• You should install snow cables or
chains that have been rated as SAE
Class S.
• Install chains securely, verifying that
the chains do not touch any wiring,
brake lines, or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h) or
less if recommended by the chain
manufacturer while using snow chains.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
chains on dry roads.
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions. The snow
chains or cables must be mounted in
pairs on the rear tires only.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to
correctly maintain tire pressures could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they could cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it will not
function.
368
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and could affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system will not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions could occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device will not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that could cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
369
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See When Inflating Your Tires in
this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E250820
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure
readings through the information display.
See General Information (page 114). The
low tire pressure warning light will turn on
if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once
the light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
370
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible cause
Low tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflated
Solid warning light Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
Flashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system will not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It could take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
371
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
could increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure
could decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a
drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure value
could be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one
or more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive
the vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the
tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it
may not function.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
system sensors. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 368). Replace
the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels.
Full-size dissimilar spare
372
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in 4WD.
• Engage 4WD unless the vehicle is
stationary.
• Use 4WD on dry pavement.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• Four-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and
Tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
just forward of the rear bumper. The jack,
swivel wrench and lug wrench are in the
following locations:
LocationItem
Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper
Spare tire
Under the access panel located in the floor
compartment behind the rear seat
Jack and tool kit bag
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: Only use replacement
tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type (such
as P-metric versus LT-metric or
all-season versus all-terrain) as those
originally provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size may
be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or the Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver's door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon
373
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park
(P), set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed. For example,
when changing the front left wheel,
place an appropriate block or wheel
chock on the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being
hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight,
including any vehicle cargo or
modifications. If you are unsure if the jack
capacity is adequate, contact the
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any
object under your vehicle. Never place
your hand between the extended running
board and your vehicle. A moving running
board may cause injury.
WARNING: Only use the spare
wheel carrier to stow the wheel provided
with your vehicle. Other wheel sizes
could cause the spare wheel carrier to
fail if it does not fit securely or is too
heavy.
E175447
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level ground
and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Apply the parking brake, place the
transmission in park (P) and switch the
ignition off.
3. Block the wheels diagonally opposite
the flat tire, for example, if the left front
tire is flat, block the right rear wheel.
Removing the Jack and Tools
Note: Pay close attention to the orientation
of the jack and tool kit bag, because it needs
to be reinstalled after changing the tire.
1. Open the liftgate and lift the load floor
behind the third row seat. If your
vehicle has an access panel, you need
to then unlatch and remove this panel.
2. Remove the wing nut by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Remove the jack and tool kit bag from
the bracket, loosen the straps and
remove the tool bag from the jack.
374
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
E252435
Removing the Spare Tire
1. Remove the swivel wrench from the
tool kit bag, open the spare tire winch
access plug at the bottom of the
compartment for the jack and tools
tray.
2. Insert the swivel wrench through the
access hole in the floor to engage the
winch. Turn the handle
counterclockwise until the tire lowers
to the ground and the cable is slightly
slack.
E273399
3. Slide the retainer through the center of
the spare tire wheel and remove the
spare tire.
Note: If your wheel nuts are hidden, the
wheel cover or ornament must be removed
using the provided tool to access the wheel
nuts.
4. Use the lug wrench tip to remove any
wheel trim.
5. Loosen each wheel lug one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them until the wheel is off the ground.
Jacking the Vehicle
WARNING: No person should place
any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
WARNING: Do not get under a
vehicle that is only supported by a
vehicle jack.
375
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
E166722
WARNING: Check that the vehicle
jack is not damaged or deformed and
the thread is lubricated and clean.
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in
an emergency.
WARNING: The jack should be
used on level firm ground wherever
possible.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and your
vehicle.
WARNING: Do not work on your
vehicle when the jack is the only support
as your vehicle could slip off the jack.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: It is recommended that
the wheels of the vehicle be chocked,
and that no person should remain in a
vehicle that is being jacked.
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
Note: The jack does not require
maintenance or additional lubrication over
the service life of your vehicle.
Note: Both the front and rear jacking points
are on the frame rails. The correct locations
on the frame rails are marked with an arrow
punched into the frame rail. Jack at the
specified locations to avoid damaging your
vehicle.
1. Position the jack at the jacking point
indicator arrow closest to the flat tire
location. Assemble the jack drive
extension to the lug wrench as shown
and use it to turn the jack drive
clockwise to raise the vehicle until the
flat tire is completely off the ground.
E325278
2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward.
3. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully
tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
4. Completely lower the vehicle by turning
the jack drive counterclockwise.
5. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 378).
376
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
E166719
1
3
5
4
6
2
Front jacking point
E325274
Rear jacking point
E325281
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear
of the vehicle, with the valve stem side
facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. You may have to
remove the wheel center cap prior to
pushing the retainer through the center
of the wheel. To remove the center cap,
press it off with the jack tool from the
inner side of the wheel. Pull on the
cable to align the components at the
end of the cable.
3. Using the swivel wrench, insert it
through the access hole behind the
third row seat and engage the winch.
4. Turn the swivel wrench clockwise until
the tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The wrench
becomes harder to turn and the spare
tire winch ratchets or slips when the
tire is raised to maximum tightness. A
clicking sound can be heard from the
winch indicating that the tire is properly
stowed.
377
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
5. Carefully place all tools back into the
tool kit bag.
6. Reinstall the tool kit bag on the jack
and tighten the straps.
7. Reinstall the jack properly on the
bracket and secure with the wing nut.
8. Close the access hole with the rubber
plug.
9. If the vehicle has an access panel,
reinstall.
10. Unblock the wheel.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel
hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
lb.ft (Nm)
1
Bolt Size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
1
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only our
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal.
378
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot bore.A
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
379
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
3.5L EcoBoostEngine
213 in³ (3,497 cm³)Engine displacement.
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
10.5:1Compression ratio.
0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)Spark plug gap.
Drivebelt Routing
E250666
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FL-500-S
1
Oil filter.
BAGM-94RH7-800Battery.
SP-578
2
Spark plugs.
FT-215Transmission filter.
380
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Part NumberComponent
WW-2248Windshield wiper blade.
WW-1107Rear window wiper blade.
1
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
2
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 475).
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your authorized dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. We engineer the parts for your vehicle to meet
and exceed our specifications. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of
other parts.
381
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
382
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
UTen-speed automatic transmission 10R80
383
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Use oil and fluid that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil and fluid that meets
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, it could result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Reduced brake performance.
Air Conditioning System
WARNING: The air conditioning
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury.
Capacities
Refrigerant OilRefrigerantVariant
6.1 fl oz (180 ml)37 oz (1.05 kg)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AR-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.)
R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
WSS-M2C300-A2Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
Automatic Transmission
Note: Only use MERCON® ULV
transmission fluid for automatic
transmissions that require MERCON® ULV
transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid
could cause transmission damage.
384
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
QuantityVariant
13.1 qt (12.4 L)
1
All.
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
Engine Coolant
Capacities
QuantityVariant
16.9 qt (16 L)With base radiator.
16.4 qt (15.5 L)With heavy-duty trailer towing.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B57-A2Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/
Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
385
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Oil
E142732
E276075
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN PLUS requirements and display the
API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Including the Oil FilterVariant
6.0 qt (5.7 L)All.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil(U.S.)
Engine Oil - SAE 5W-30 - Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
386
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-B1Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
E240523
Fuel Tank
Capacities
QuantityVariant
23.2 gal (87.8 L)Base.
27.8 gal (105.2 L)Expedition MAX.
Grease
Materials
SpecificationName
ESB-M1C93-BMotorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / Graisse
tout usage en aérosol Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-5-A(U.S. & Canada)
387
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Hydraulic Brake System
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid could cause reduced brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials could result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Locks
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid / Liquide dégrippant
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-1(U.S.)
CXC-51-A(Canada)
Transfer Case
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Four-wheel drive with torque on demand.
1.6–1.8 qt (1.5–1.7 L)Four-wheel drive with electronic shift on
the fly.
388
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
Front Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
1.8 qt (1.7 L)Four-wheel drive.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
8.8" Rear Axle
Capacities
QuantityVariant
2.5 qt (2.4 L)
1
All.
1
The rear axle is filled with synthetic rear axle lubricant, and is considered lubricated for
life. Do not check or change the lubricant unless you suspect a leak or submerge the axle
in water. Contact an authorized dealer.
389
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
9.75" Rear Axle Without Limited-Slip
Capacities
QuantityVariant
2.5 qt (2.4 L)
1
All.
1
The rear axle is filled with synthetic rear axle lubricant, and is considered lubricated for
life. Do not check or change the lubricant unless you suspect a leak or submerge the axle
in water. Contact an authorized dealer.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
390
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
9.75" Rear Axle with Limited-Slip
Capacities
QuantityVariant
2.4 qt (2.3 L)
1
All.
1
The rear axle is filled with synthetic rear axle lubricant, and is considered lubricated for
life. Do not check or change the lubricant unless you suspect a leak or submerge the axle
in water. Contact an authorized dealer.
Note: Add 4 fl oz (118 ml) of Additive
Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent for
complete refill of our limited-slip differential
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C942-AMotorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
EST-M2C118-AMotorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier / Additif
modificateur de friction Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
Washer Reservoir
Capacities
QuantityVariant
Fill as required.All.
391
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen-
trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F(Canada)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
57444NAFront direction indicator.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamp.
55H11Halogen headlamp low beam.
55HB3Halogen headlamp high beam.
LEDLEDLED headlamp.
559140Halogen front fog lamp.
LEDLEDLED front fog lamp.
LEDLEDFront side marker lamp.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
273057KRear lamp, brake lamp and rear direction indicator.
392
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDLED rear lamp, brake lamp and rear direction indic-
ator.
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.
273057KReversing lamp.
5W5WLicense plate lamp.
LED lamps are not serviceable. Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDGlove compartment lamp if equipped.
LEDLEDVanity mirror lamp.
LEDLEDMap lamp.
LEDLED
Interior lamp.
1
LEDLEDRear dome lamp.
1
Second row rail lamp.
LED lamps are not serviceable. Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.
393
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Capacities and Specifications
CONNECTED VEHICLE
REQUIREMENTS
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle
network.
Some remote features require additional
service activation. Log in to your Ford
account for details. Some restrictions, third
party terms and message or data rates
may apply.
CONNECTED VEHICLE
LIMITATIONS
Evolving technology, cellular networks, or
regulations could affect functionality and
availability, or continued provision of some
features. These changes could even stop
some features from functioning.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A MOBILE NETWORK
What Is the Modem
The modem allows access to a
range of features built into your
vehicle.
Enabling and Disabling the Modem
1. Press Settings.
2. Press FordPass Connect.
3. Press Connectivity Settings.
4. Switch connectivity features on or off.
Connecting FordPass to the
Modem
1. Make sure that the modem is enabled
using the vehicle settings menu.
2. Open the FordPass app on your device
and log in.
3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
if already added.
4. Select the option for vehicle details.
5. Select the option to activate your
vehicle.
6. Make sure that the name on the screen
matches the name shown in your
FordPass account.
7. Confirm that FordPass account is
connected to the modem.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A WI-FI NETWORK
1. Press Settings.
2. Press Wi-Fi.
3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
4. Press View Available Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
394
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi
network.
– Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection
disconnects after successful
connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot
but the network signal
strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the
list of available networks
that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again.
395
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Connected Vehicle
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot see the Wi-Fi
hotspot name when I search
for Wi-Fi networks on my
cell phone or other device.
– System limitation.
• Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
• The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at
this time.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take
too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
The system seems to
connect to a Wi-Fi network
and the signal strength is
excellent but the software
does not update.
396
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Connected Vehicle
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI
HOTSPOT
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it
for access to the Internet.
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
1. Select Connectivity Features.
2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting
is on.
3. Select Settings.
4. Make sure that you have Wi-Fi visibility
switched on.
Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting is
on.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
and Password
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
1. Select Connectivity Features.
2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.
3. Select Settings.
Note: The SSID is the hotspot name.
4. Scroll to Hide password.
5. Uncheck the box.
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot
1. On your device, turn on Wi-Fi and select
the hotspot from the list of available
Wi-Fi networks.
2. When prompted, enter the password.
Purchasing a Data Plan
1. Connect a device to the hotspot.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal
opens on your device.
2. If the portal does not open on your
device, open a website and it redirects
to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
Note: If you have an active plan, the system
does not redirect to the vehicle network
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website
to purchase more data.
Note: If data usage information is available
in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
approximate.
Note: If you carry out a master reset, the
system does not remove your vehicle from
your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
remove your vehicle from the account,
contact your vehicle network carrier.
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-
FI HOTSPOT NAME OR
PASSWORD
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
1. Select Connectivity Features.
2. Select Vehicle Hotspot.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select SSID: ___.
5. Enter your required SSID.
6. Select Done.
7. Select Password: ___.
8. Enter your required password.
9. Select Done.
397
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES
WITHOUT: TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
398
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
E293085
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
Accessing the Sound Settings
E280315
Press and release the button.
Accessing the Settings Menu
Press and release the button to
access the settings menu.
Follow the on-screen prompts
to make your selection.
Adjusting the Volume
E248939
Turn to adjust the volume.
Changing Radio Stations
E248947
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
399
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
Playing or Pausing Media
Press and release the button to
either play or pause current
media source.
Returning to the Previous Screen
E281480
Press and release the button.
Scrolling Through the Menu
Options
E248947
Selecting a Menu Option
E248946
Selecting the Radio
Press and release the button to
select radio mode.
Press and release the button
again to display the available radio
sources. Repeatedly press the button to
scroll through the available radio sources.
Selecting Media
E100027
Press the button to select media
mode.
Press the button again to display
the available media sources. Repeatedly
press the button to scroll through the
available media sources.
Setting a Memory Preset
Tune to a station then press and hold one
of the numbered memory preset buttons.
The audio mutes briefly while the system
saves the station and returns once the
station is stored.
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Note: The button may be on the volume
control.
Using Apps
Select to search for and use
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device.
Using a Cell Phone
Press and release to make a call
from a recent call list, contact
list or dial a number.
400
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The
system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
In satellite radio mode, press and release
to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
next or previous station in that category.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
E293086
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features.
Accessing the Sound Settings
E280315
Press and release the button to
access settings.
Adjusting the Volume
E265373
Turn to adjust the volume.
401
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
Changing Radio Stations
E265696
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
Muting the Audio
Press and release the button to
mute the playing audio.
Playing or Pausing Media
Press and release the button to
either play or pause the audio.
Setting the Memory Presets
Tune to a station then press and hold one
of the numbered memory preset buttons.
The audio mutes briefly while the system
saves the station and returns once the
station is stored.
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Note: The power button may be on the
volume dial.
Switching the Display On and Off
E272035
Press and release the button.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The
system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
In satellite radio mode, press and release
to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
next or previous station in that category.
DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts, where
available, in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
402
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode, only, if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations, HD2 through HD7, are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
403
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for the accuracy of all audio
streams and data fields.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
1
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
1
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
404
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
variety of music, news, sports, weather,
traffic and entertainment satellite radio
channels. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
405
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account.
Locating Your ESN
With satellite radio as the source, use the
touchscreen to select the following:
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page
457).
2. Select SiriusXM.
3. Select SiriusXM information.
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SiriusXM satellite or Siri-
usXM tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
406
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
USB A
E201595
USB C
E301114
407
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices.
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
cables and adapters may not work.
Locating the USB Ports
The USB ports may be in the following
locations:
• Inside the media bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the lower instrument panel.
Note: The number and type of USB ports
may vary depending on your vehicle.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have
data transfer capabilities. See Auxiliary
Power Points (page 169).
408
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your Bluetooth
enabled cellular phone and portable media
player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance
and applications via SYNC AppLink.
*
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected
phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
• Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*
These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
SYNC support is available at your regional
Ford website. See SYNC™
Troubleshooting (page 417).
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
409
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when you connect the cellular phone or
media player. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
No one can access system data without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 413).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
Gives you available commands you can use
on the current screen.
Help
Gives you a list of possible voice
commands.
List of Commands
This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by pressing seek
up, seek down, or holding the voice button
for two or more seconds.
Cancel
410
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
Interaction Mode Standard
Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
Interaction Mode Advanced
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
Phone Confirmation Off
The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
Phone Confirmation On
411
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Pairing a Phone
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or
neutral (N) for manual transmission.
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the Settings button.
3. Select Bluetooth from the menu.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone and
downloading your phonebook.
Using Voice Commands
E142599
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
Follow the instruc-
tions on the audio
display.
Pair Phone
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. You can
do things like place a phone call
and access text messages.
When prompted, say a command. See the
following table for examples of
commands.
Voice Command
___ List of Commands
Help
Call ___
Dial ___
Text Messages
412
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
contact or phone number.
Phone Controls
Use the phone buttons on your steering
wheel to answer, reject, or hang up a call.
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Scroll through the menu to view
contacts, text messages, and the
phone dialer.
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications (if your
phone is compatible).
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the
system will not dial for help which could
delay response time, potentially
increasing the risk of serious injury or
death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911
Assist to make an emergency call if you
can do it yourself. Dial emergency
services immediately to avoid delayed
response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a
crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within
five seconds of the crash, the system or
phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your
phone in a secure location in your vehicle
so it does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent
911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
413
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 48). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 302).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On or Off
Press the Settings button then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Select the desired option, on
or off.
911 Assist
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth
enabled and compatible cell phone to
SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle are
able to talk with the operator. Be prepared
to provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
414
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website
Note: Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled
Apps will vary by region.
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the Mobile Apps button to access
the menu on-screen. Then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
select a particular app.
Find
Mobile
Apps
Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button, then when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
Mobile Applications
SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps.List Applications
Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible
mobile apps.
Find Applications
Use this command to discover the available voice commands.Help
415
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
• To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
• To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
SYNC supports digital media sources
including: iPod, Bluetooth devices, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports
audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.
Media Sources
The AUX or MEDIA button allows you to
view and select available media sources.
Press the AUX or MEDIA button to view
your sources. Use the directional arrows
and OK button to select your source. You
can also use the steering wheel audio
controls.
416
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
Audio Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. You can
do things like play a specific song
or album, or tune to a radio
station. When prompted, say a command.
See the following table for example
commands. Not all commands may be
available on your vehicle.
Command
___ List of Commands
Help
Pause
Play
AM ___
FM ___
CD Player
Sirius Channel ___
USB
Bluetooth Audio
__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as an
artist, station, or media source.
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use your regional Ford website at any time
to check your phone's compatibility,
register your account and set preferences
as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during
certain hours).
Website(s)Market
www.SYNCMyRide.comNorth America
www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.sync-
maroute.ca
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
417
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
418
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Press the Phone button to
return to the Phone menu.
You are on the Select a
Character screen.
I cannot return to the Phone
menu when selecting a
contact.
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
419
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
Switch radio bands and
return to Sirius or switch the
feature off. You can then
change the Sirius station
using the directional
buttons.
Sirius Replay is active.
I cannot change the Sirius
station.
420
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
421
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
422
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some appsAppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
423
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth bug on
some older versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
424
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
425
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
About SYNC
The system allows you to interact with the
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands and a touchscreen.
The system provides easy interaction with
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings.
Note: You can switch the system on and
use it for up to an hour without switching
the ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes
or until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to
when your vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Using the Touchscreen
E293823
Status bar.A
Home screen.B
Clock. See Settings (page 457).C
Outside air temperature.D
Feature bar.E
Status Bar
Cell phone microphone muted.
Audio system muted.
Software update installed.
Wi-Fi connected.
Cell phone roaming.
Text message received.
426
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Automatic crash notification
system off.
Cell phone network signal
strength.
Vehicle data sharing on.
Vehicle location sharing on.
Vehicle data and vehicle location
sharing on.
Wireless charger active.
Feature Bar
E100027
Select to use the radio, a USB, a
media player or a Bluetooth
device. See Entertainment
(page 435).
E283811
Select to adjust climate settings
See Climate (page 445).
Select to make calls and access
the phonebook on your cell
phone. See Phone (page 447).
Select to use the navigation
system. See Navigation (page
449).
Select to search for and use
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device. See Apps (page
454).
E280315
Select to adjust system settings.
See Settings (page 457).
Cleaning the Touchscreen
See Cleaning the Interior (page 346).
Updating the System
Updating the System Using a USB Drive
Downloading an Update
1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
local Ford website.
2. Download the update.
Note: The website notifies you if an update
is available.
3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
meet the minimum requirements detailed
on the website.
4. Follow the instructions provided to
download the update to the USB drive.
Installing an Update
Note: You can use the system when an
installation is in progress.
1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
the USB ports.
2. Connect the USB drive with the update
to a USB port.
Note: Installation starts automatically
within 10 minutes.
Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi
Network Connection
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Automatic Updates.
2. Select System Wi-Fi.
3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
4. Select Available Wi-Fi Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
427
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Switching Automatic System Updates
On
E280315
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Automatic Updates.
2. Switch Automatic System Updates
on.
The system is now set to check for and
receive system updates when it is
connected to a Wi-Fi network.
Note: You can use the system when a
download is in progress.
Note: If the system is disconnected from
the Wi-Fi network when a download is in
progress, the download continues the next
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi
network.
Additional Information and
Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to the local Ford
website.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
___ List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
428
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Help
Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".
1
Sirius Channel ___
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
1
FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth
connected device.
Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist The Beatles" or "Play song
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
429
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse artist The Beatles" or "Browse genre
folk".
Browse ___
Browse Artist ___
Browse Album ___
Browse Genre ___
Browse Playlist ___
Browse Audiobook ___
Browse Podcast ___
1
This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands (If Equipped)
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).
Set the Temperature to ____
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 457).
Pair Phone
430
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309” .Dial ___
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
431
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
You can say the number of the message you
would like to respond to.
Reply to Message ____
You can say the contact of the most recent
message to respond.
Reply to ____
Navigation Voice Commands (If
Equipped)
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more
than 20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.
Find an Address
State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".
Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find a POI
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find an Intersection
State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
like to search for.
Find the Nearest
<POI Category>
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Show Previous
Destinations
432
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.Show Favorites
Allows you to route to your home address.Drive Home
Allows you to route to your work address.Drive to Work
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.Route Summary
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
433
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app, followed by
help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Fore-
cast
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode
Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Phone Confirmation On
434
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Phone Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts.
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust the fan speed during a voice
session, simply press the fan buttons (or
turn the fan knob) to increase or decrease
the fan speed to the setting you prefer.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
E293491
Audio source. Select to choose
a different audio source.
A
Presets. Swipe left to view more
presets.
B
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
435
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
AM
FM
1
SIRIUS
CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
Apps
1
This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit
without changing
the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
436
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E234451
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. We are not responsible for any such
programming changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
437
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts.
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
ence and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
438
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting Tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the Siri-
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring
signal…
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call 1-
888-539-7474
Use the channel guide or the
Sirius XM Settings tile to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found. Check
channel guide.
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription
updated
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 457).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
439
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you to cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
440
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
441
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
1
You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS. The vehicle
manufacturer and DTS are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed,
added or deleted at any time at the station
owner's discretion.
CD (If Equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
Repeat
442
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.
Browse
This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
New Search
Play All
443
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Explore Device
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 454).
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
444
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 457).
Accessing the Climate Control
Menu
E265038
Touch the button to access
additional controls for the front
climate system.
Directing the Airflow
Touch the button to direct
airflow to the windshield air
vents and de-mister.
E244097
Touch the button to direct
airflow to the instrument panel
air vents.
Touch the button to direct
airflow to the footwell air vents.
You can direct air through any combination
of these air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Touch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume of air that
circulates in your vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
Touch up or down on the left-hand
temperature control to set the left-hand
temperature.
Note: This control also adjusts the
right-hand side temperature when you
switch off dual zone mode.
Touch up or down on the right-hand
temperature control to set the right-hand
temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Touch the button to switch on
automatic operation, then set
the temperature.
The system adjusts the blower motor
speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air
to reach and maintain the temperature you
have set.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
A pop-up appears on the screen
to display the air conditioning
options.
MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate
and maximize cooling. The driver and
passenger temperatures are set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning
automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
445
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning
on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to
improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, such as
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On
and Off
Touch the button.
Switching the Climate Controlled
Seats On and Off
E265282
Touch the button to cycle
through the various climate
controlled seat settings.
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off
E265280
Touch the button to switch on
temperature control for the
right-hand side of the vehicle.
Switching the Heated Exterior
Mirrors On and Off
E266189
Touch the button.
Switching the Heated Windshield
On and Off
Touch the button to clear the
windshield of thin ice and fog.
The heated windshield turns off
after a short period of time.
Switching the Heated Rear
Window On and Off
E184884
Touch the button to clear the
rear window of thin ice and fog.
Switching the Heated Seats On
and Off
Touch the button to cycle
through the various heat
settings.
Switching the Heated Steering
Wheel On and Off
Touch the button.
Switching Maximum Air
Conditioning On and Off
Touch the button for maximum
cooling.
Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to
the highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Touch the button for maximum
defrosting.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
446
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Note: The heated rear window also turns
on when you select maximum defrost.
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off
Touch the button to switch
between outside air and
recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may
reduce the time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Switching the Ventilated Seats On
and Off
E268558
Touch the button to cycle
through the various ventilated
seat settings.
Accessing Rear Climate Controls
E270447
Touch the button to access
additional controls for the rear
climate system.
Rear Climate Control Lock
Indicator
E265289
Touch the button.
When on, you can only operate
the rear passenger settings
through the front controls.
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and
Off
Touch the button to switch on
rear automatic operation, then
set the temperature.
Switching the Rear Climate
Controlled Seats On and Off
E265282
Touch the button to cycle
through the various climate
controlled seat settings.
Switching the Rear Heated Seats
On and Off
Touch the button to cycle
through the various heat
settings.
Switching the Rear Ventilated
Seats On and Off
E268558
Touch the button to cycle
through the various ventilated
seat settings.
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
447
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Check the compatibility of your device on
the regional website.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Go to the settings menu on your cell phone
and switch Bluetooth on.
Select the phone option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Add Phone.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your cell phone.
2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone
and on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the number on your cell
phone matches the number on the
touchscreen.
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your cell phone.
4. Download the phonebook from your
cell phone when you are prompted.
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone,
use the phone settings to specify the
primary phone. You can change this setting
at any time.
Using Your Cell Phone
Recent Call List
Display and select an entry from a list of
previous calls.
Contacts
Display a smart search form to look up your
contacts. Use the List button to
alphabetically sort your contacts.
Change Phone
Display the list of paired or connected
devices that you can select.
Phone Settings
Change ring tones, alerts or pair another
phone.
Do Not Disturb
Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
and alerts off.
Phone Keypad
Directly dial a number.
Mute
Mute the microphone when in a call or
voice recognition session.
Text Messaging
Setting Text Message Notification
iOS
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the information icon to the right
of your vehicle.
4. Switch text message notification on.
Android
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select the profiles option.
4. Select the phone profile.
5. Switch text message notification on.
448
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Using Text Messaging
DescriptionMenu Item
Hear the text message.Hear It
View the text message.View
Call the sender.Call
Reply to the text message with a standard text message.Reply
Apple CarPlay (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Apple
CarPlay.
Switching Apple CarPlay Off
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Apple CarPlay Preferences.
2. Switch Apple CarPlay off.
Android Auto (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: You might need to enable Android
Auto from the settings menu.
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Android
Auto.
Switching Android Auto Off
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
1. Select Android Auto.
2. Switch Android Auto off.
NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: For more information, refer to our
website.
Select the navigation option on
the feature bar.
E297557
Map view menu.A
Zoom out.B
Zoom in.C
Route guidance menu.D
Destination entry menu.E
449
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Setting a Destination
Destination Entry Menu
DescriptionItem
Enter a destination address.Search
Display and select from a list of previous destinations.Previous Destinations
Set your saved home address as your destinationHome
Set your saved place of work as your destination.Work
Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.Favorites
Setting a Destination Using the Text
Entry Screen
E297558
Text entry field.A
Automatic suggestions based on
the text you enter.
B
Information icon.C
Search.D
Keyboard settings.E
Note: Select one of the suggestions to
copy the detail to the text entry field.
You can search by entering all or part of
the destination, such as the Address, POI
Category or Name, Intersection, City,
Latitude/Longitude, etc. Tips: If you do
not specify a location, the system will
use the current vehicle location. You can
specify a location by address, city, state
or zip code. For additional search support,
please visit: support.ford.com.
Note: Press the button in the top right-hand
corner of the main map to display estimated
time of arrival, remaining travel time or
distance to destination.
450
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Setting a Destination Using the Map
Screen
E297559
Re-center the map.A
Selected location.B
3D map rotation. Swipe left or
right.
C
Start route guidance.D
Destination name.E
Select the location on the map.
Select Start to begin route guidance.
Changing the Format of the Map
Display the map in one of the following
formats:
• A two-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the
top of the screen.
• A two-dimensional map with north
toward the top of the screen.
• A three-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the
front.
Zoom
Display more or less detail on the map.
Note: You can use pinch gestures to zoom
in and out. Place two fingers on the screen
and move them apart to zoom in. Place two
fingers on the screen and bring them
together to zoom out.
Route Guidance
E297560
F
A
Turn indicator. Select to hear the
last voice prompt.
A
Point of interest.B
Estimated time of arrival,
distance to destination or time
to destination.
C
Current road.D
Mute guidance prompts.E
Cancel route guidance.F
Note: To change guidance prompt volume,
turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays.
451
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Route Guidance Menu
DescriptionMenu Item
Adjust your map preferences for when route guidance is active.Screen View
View a full screen map when route guidance is active.Full Map
View highway exit information for your current route.Highway Exit Info
View the turn list for your current route. Select a road to avoid
it.
Turn List
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information
by pressing this button. This information requires an active
subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a route
is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays. When a
route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Traffic List
Adjust navigation settings. See Settings (page 457).Navigation Settings
View information about your current location.Where Am I?
Cancel route guidance.Cancel Route
View the entire current route on the map.View Route
View an alternative route compared to your current one.Detour
Change the order or remove waypoints.Edit Waypoints
The system determines the order of waypoints for you.Optimize Order
Go to the next screen and start the new route.Go
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt
Volume
Turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume.
Note: If you have inadvertently adjusted
the volume to zero, press the turn indicator
button to play the last voice prompt and
then adjust the volume to the desired level.
Muting Guidance Prompts
Select the mute option on the
screen to mute guidance
prompts.
Note: The system mutes the next and all
future guidance prompts.
Adding Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
You can add up to five waypoints.
1. Select the search option on the map.
2. Set a destination.
3. Select Add Waypoint.
4. Select Go.
452
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Canceling Route Guidance
Select the route guidance menu
option on the active guidance
screen.
Select Cancel Route.
E294817
Note: The route guidance menu option is
always in the bottom right-hand corner of
the main map.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.
Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
453
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores.
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.
Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped)
The Michelin travel guide is a service which
provides additional information about
certain places of interest, for example
restaurants, hotels and tourist sites. Points
of interest that have Michelin travel guide
information display a button to show you
more information. Push the button to see
the additional information. If you have
paired your phone with the system, you
can press the phone button to directly
establish a call with the selected point of
interest.
Navigation Map Accuracy and
Updates
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to www.here.com. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
The navigation system map data may
contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time,
changing circumstances, sources used and
the nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results. Inaccurate speed limit
information, turn restrictions and other
road attributes may affect the determined
route and associated guidance
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership. Depending on your purchase
agreement, you might be eligible for free
Map update. You can choose to download
the Map data update onto a USB, order a
USB, or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic
updates. To update your Map data over
Wi-Fi, your vehicle must be connected to
a Wi-Fi access point. Map Data files are
large, so it is highly recommended to
perform the update when free Wi-Fi is
available otherwise high data rates may
apply. For USB updates, free map update
eligibility, and other details, contact
dealers at 1-866-462-8837 in the United
States and Canada or 01-800-557-5539
in Mexico or visit our local website for more
information.
APPS
The system allows you interact with select
mobile apps while keeping your eyes on
the road. Voice commands, your steering
wheel buttons, or a quick tap on your
touchscreen give you advanced control of
compatible mobile apps. You can also
stream your favorite music or podcasts,
share your time of arrival with friends, and
keep connected safely.
454
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
When you start an app through the system
for the first time, you could be asked to
grant certain permissions. You can review
and change the permissions that you have
granted at any time when your vehicle is
not moving. We recommend that you
check your data plan before using your
apps through the system. Using them
could result in additional charges. We also
recommend that you check the app
provider's terms and conditions and
privacy policy before using their app. Make
sure that you have an active account for
apps that you want to use through the
system. Some apps will work with no
setup. Others require you to configure
some personal settings before you can use
them.
Note: For more information about available
apps, visit catalog.ford.com.
Using Apps on an iOS Device
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. If your device is connected via USB,
switch Apple CarPlay off. See Phone
(page 447).
2. Connect your device to a USB port or
pair and connect using Bluetooth.
3. If prompted to enable CarPlay, select
Disable.
4. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the
system.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Connect your device to a USB port if
you want to use a navigation app. When
using a navigation app, keep your device
unlocked and the app open.
Using Apps on an Android Device
Select the apps option on the
feature bar.
1. If your device is connected via USB,
switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 447).
2. Pair your device. See Phone (page 447).
3. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the
system.
4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
Note: The system searches and connects
to compatible apps that are running on your
device.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
the touchscreen.
Note: Mobile Apps on your device use the
USB port to establish a connection with
SYNC. Some devices may lose the ability to
play music over USB when Mobile Apps are
enabled.
Using Mobile Navigation on an
Android Device
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 447).
3. Switch on Enable Mobile Apps via
USB in the Mobile Apps Settings tile.
4. Select the apps option on the feature
bar.
5. Select the navigation app that you
want to use on the touchscreen.
Note: When using a navigation app, keep
your device unlocked and the app open.
455
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Map
456
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
E280315
Press the button to enter the
settings menu.
E268570
Once you select a tile, press the
button next to a menu item to
view an explanation of the
feature or setting.
Sound
Select this tile to adjust the sound settings.
Clock
Select this tile to adjust the clock settings.
Bluetooth
Select this tile to switch Bluetooth on and
off and adjust the settings.
Phone
Select this tile to connect, disconnect, and
manage the connected device settings.
Audio
Select this tile to adjust the audio settings.
Driver Assist (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust Driver Assist
features like Parking Aids, Lane Keeping
System, Pedestrian Detection, and
Auto-Start-Stop.
Vehicle
Select this tile to adjust vehicle settings
like windows, alarm, lighting, and MyKey
settings.
FordPass
Select this tile to adjust the FordPass
settings
General
Select this tile to adjust settings like
language, measurement units, or to reset
the system.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
Select this tile to switch 911 Assist on and
off.
Automatic Updates
Select this tile to adjust the automatic
update settings.
Mobile Apps
Select this tile to adjust permissions,
enable, disable, and update mobile apps.
457
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Display
Select this tile to adjust display settings
like brightness and auto dim.
Charge Settings (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the electric vehicle
charge settings.
Voice Control
Select this tile to adjust voice control
settings like command confirmations and
displayed lists.
Navigation (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust navigation settings
like map preferences and route guidance.
Multi Contour Seats (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the position and
massage function of your multi contour
seats.
Seats (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the lumbar
function of your seats.
Message Center (If Equipped)
Select this tile to view vehicle messages.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust recalled memory
features when using personal profiles.
Valet Mode (If Equipped)
Select this tile to enable and disable valet
mode.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Select this tile to change the color or
intensity of the interior lighting.
458
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Voice Recognition
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
The system does not under-
stand what I am saying.
– You are using the wrong voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 428).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You are speaking too soon.
• Wait for the voice prompt before you speak.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a track or
artist.
– Device limitation. Bluetooth does not support voice
commands.
• Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
– You are using the wrong voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 428).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the name of the track or artist exactly as it
appears on your device. Spell out any abbreviations
in the name.
The song or artist name may have some special char-
acters that are not being recognized by the system.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the files on your device or use the touch-
screen to select and play the track.
459
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
as it appears on your device. Spell out any abbrevi-
ations in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the contact on your device or use the
touchscreen to select and call the contact.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a contact
in the phonebook on my
device and calls the wrong
contact.
– You are not saying the name exactly as it appears on
your device.
• Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
as it appears on your device. The system applies
phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names of contacts in the phone-
book on your device. Select the name of the
contact on the touchscreen and use the Hear it
option to get an idea of how the system expects
you to pronounce it.
The system does not under-
stand foreign names of
contacts in the phonebook
on my device.
– Device limitation.
• The system uses text-to-speech technology and
uses a synthetically generated voice rather than
pre-recorded human voice.
The system voice prompts
and the pronunciation of
some words does not seem
to be very accurate.
USB and Bluetooth Audio
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect my device. – Device malfunction.
• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off,
reset it and try again.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
460
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Incorrect device settings.
• Make sure that your device does not have an auto-
install program or active security settings.
• Check that your device is not set only to charge.
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
The system does not recog-
nize my device.
– Device limitation.
• Do not leave your device in your vehicle during very
hot or very cold weather conditions.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
The system does not under-
stand the name of a track or
artist.
– Device limitation. Bluetooth does not support voice
commands.
• Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
I cannot stream audio from
my Bluetooth device.
– Incompatible device.
• Check the compatibility of your device on our
website.
– Device not connected.
• Pair your device. See Phone (page 447).
– Media player not running.
• Start the media player on your device.
The system does not recog-
nize the music on my device.
– Missing or incorrect audio file metadata, for example
artist, song title, album or genre.
• Repair the files on your device.
– Corrupt files.
• Repair the files on your device.
461
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Copyright protected files.
• Use a device that contains files that are not copy-
right protected.
– Unsupported file format.
• Repair or convert the files to a supported format.
See Entertainment (page 435).
– Device indexing required.
• Re-index your device. See Settings (page 457).
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
Sometimes I cannot hear a
track playing on my device.
– Device malfunction.
• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off,
reset it and try again.
When I disconnect my iOS
device the audio volume is
set to maximum.
– Device limitation.
• Turn the volume down on your device
If the system does not play the tracks on your USB device
in the correct order, the following information could help:
The system does not play
the tracks on my USB drive
in the correct order.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source when the
system is still indexing, SYNC plays tracks sorted
alphabetically by file name in the root directory.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source after the
system has finished indexing, SYNC plays all tracks
sorted alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag
regardless of where they are located. SYNC uses the
file name if the title in the ID3 Tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting the option to play all tracks from
the browsing menu, SYNC plays all tracks sorted
alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag regardless of
where they are located. SYNC uses the file name if the
title in the ID3 Tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting a track when using the explore
device option, SYNC plays tracks sorted alphabetically
by file name in the folder you have selected. SYNC
then plays all tracks in any subfolders in the folder you
have selected.
462
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Phone
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
During a call, I can hear
excessive background noise.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Check and adjust the audio settings on your cell
phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone and Bluetooth on and off
and try again.
– Cell phone microphone muted.
• Unmute your cell phone microphone.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
During a call, I cannot hear
the other person and they
cannot hear me.
– System restart required.
• Restart the system. Switch the ignition off and
open the door. Close the door and lock the vehicle.
Wait until the touchscreen is off and any illumin-
ated USB ports are not illuminated. Unlock the
vehicle, switch the ignition on and try again.
I cannot download phone-
book.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
Settings (page 457).
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
• Check the location of the missing contacts on your
cell phone. If they are stored on the SIM card, move
them to the cell phone memory.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
Settings (page 457).
A message displays
suggesting that my phone-
book has downloaded but it
is empty or it has missing
contacts.
463
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
• Install the latest cell phone firmware.
• Delete your device from system and delete SYNC
from your device and try again.
• Switch automatic phonebook download off. See
Settings (page 457).
I cannot connect my cell
phone.
Text messaging does not
work.
– You did not switch on text message notifications.
• Switch text message notifications on. See Phone
(page 447).
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off, reset it and try again.
– Device message sharing is not enabled.
• Check the permissions on your device to ensure
text message sharing is enabled.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
I cannot hear text messages.
464
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Navigation (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot enter a street name
when I am abroad.
– Incorrect entry method.
• Enter the street name with the country.
The system does not recog-
nize coordinates.
– You are using the wrong coordinates format.
• Use the format ##. #####, ##. ##### (for N/S ,
E/W). Add a minus before coordinates if the
direction is West and keep a positive value if the
direction is East, for example 12.5412 means East
and -12.5412 means West.
465
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Apps
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
The system cannot find any
apps.
– Incompatible device.
• You will need an Android device with OS 4.3 or
higher or an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher. Pair
and connect your Android device to find AppLink
compatible apps. Connect your iOS device to a
USB port or pair and connect using Bluetooth.
I have a compatible device
and it is correctly connected
but the system still cannot
find any apps.
– AppLink compatible apps not installed on your device.
• Download and install the latest version of the app.
– AppLink compatible apps not running on your device.
• Start the apps to allow the system to find them
and make sure you sign in to any apps if required.
– Incorrect app settings.
• Check and adjust the app settings on your device
and allow SYNC to access the app if required.
I have a compatible device,
it is correctly connected and
my apps are running but the
system still cannot find any
apps.
– Apps failed to fully close.
• Restart the apps and try again.
• If you have an Android device with apps that have
an exit or quit option, use this and then restart the
apps. Alternatively, use the force stop option in the
settings menu on your device.
• If you have an iOS device with iOS 7.0 or higher, tap
the home button on your device twice and then
swipe the app upward to close it.
I have an Android device
that is correctly connected,
I have restarted my apps
and they are running but the
system still cannot find
them.
– An issue on some older versions of the Android oper-
ating system could result in apps not being found.
• Switch Bluetooth off and on again to force the
system to reconnect to your device.
466
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I have an iOS device that is
correctly connected, I have
restarted my apps and they
are running but the system
still cannot find them.
– Cable connection issue.
• Disconnect the cable from your device, wait for a
moment and then connect it again to force the
system to reconnect to your device.
I have an Android device
running a media app which
the system has found but I
cannot hear the sound or
the sound is very quiet.
– Device volume is low.
• Turn the volume up on your device.
I have an Android device
running a number of
compatible apps but the
system cannot find all of
them.
– Device limitation. Some Android devices have a limited
number of Bluetooth ports that apps can use to
connect. If you have more apps running on your device
than the number of available Bluetooth ports, the
system cannot find all of them.
• Close some of the apps to allow the system to find
those that you want to use.
467
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Connectivity
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi
network.
– Password error.
• Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID,. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection
disconnects after successful
connection.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot
but the network signal
strength is weak.
– Obstructed network signal.
• If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the
list of available networks
that I expect to see.
– Hidden network.
• Make the network visible and try again.
468
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and ResolutionSymptom
I cannot see SYNC when I
search for Wi-Fi networks on
my cell phone or other
device.
– System limitation.
• SYNC does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.
– Weak network signal
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Software downloads take
too long.
– No software update available.
– Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
of terms and conditions.
• Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
The system seems to
connect to a Wi-Fi network
and the signal strength is
excellent but the software
does not update.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Possible Cause and SolutionSymptom
You have not set up Personal Profiles.
I cannot create a profile.
You entered an invalid profile.
You did not select a memory button when prompted.
You did not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
Personal Profiles has been switched off.
You did not select the lock button on the remote control.
I cannot link a remote
control.
The remote control selected was already associated with
another profile and the system declined to overwrite.
The system performed a profile recall when linking a
remote control.
You did not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
469
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Possible Cause and SolutionSymptom
You are using the old linking method.
Personal Profiles does not support your unsaved settings.
My personalized settings do
not save.
A different personal profile is active.
Another user changed the settings for the wrong personal
profile.
You did not create a personal profile.
My profile will not recall.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The profile you requested is already active.
You did not link the memory button you are using to a
profile.
You did not link the remote control you are using to a
profile.
You are using the wrong remote control.
You are pressing a button other than the unlock or remote
start on a linked remote control.
You deleted the personal profile.
You switched the personal profiles off.My preset positions recall,
but my profile does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my
preset positions do not.
The preset positions are the same as the guest or previ-
ously active profile.
Unlink and relink your remote control in the Personal
Profiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer.
I lost a remote control.
You erased and reprogrammed the remote controls. This
could happen if you let a dealership add a new remote
control to replace a lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Someone performed a master reset without your know-
ledge.
470
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
Resetting the System
1. Simultaneously press and hold the
seek up and the audio unit power
buttons until the screen goes black.
2. Wait three minutes to allow the system
to complete the reset.
3. Press the audio unit power button to
switch the system on.
Note: You can reset the system to restore
functionality that has stopped working. The
system reset is designed to restore
functionality and not delete any data that
you have stored.
Additional Information and
Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to our website.
471
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
SYNC™ 3
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
We will repair or replace any properly
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original
Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship
during the warranty period, as well as any
component damaged by the defective
accessories.
We will warrant your Ford Original
Accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Ford Licensed Accessories are the
accessory manufacturer's designs. The
manufacturer develops and therefore
warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and
does not design or test these accessories
to Ford Motor Company engineering
requirements. Contact an authorized Ford
dealer for the manufacturer’s limited
warranty details, and request a copy of the
Ford Licensed Accessories product limited
warranty from the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
472
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)
Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
473
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
• Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 5% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.
474
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Ford Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 380).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use our authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor system, a message appears in the
information display at the proper oil
change interval. This interval may be up to
one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km), hybrid
vehicles may exceed 10,000 mi
(16,000 km).
475
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil
Change Indicator Reset (page 328).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals,
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
We have recommended maintenance
intervals for various parts and component
systems based upon engineering testing.
We rely upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the our
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’ s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
476
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
477
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure
2
Fluid levels
1
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how your
vehicle is used. By using several important
factors in its calculations, the monitor
helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste
at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
478
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Change the engine oil and filter.
2
Rotate the tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection - recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level - vehicles with dipstick. Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the front axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
479
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
Brake Fluid Maintenance
1
Change the brake fluid.
2
Every 3 Years
1
Perform this maintenance item every 3 years. Do not exceed the designated time for
the interval.
2
Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace the cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi (32,000 km)
Replace the engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi (160,000 km)
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s).
2
Change the automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi (240,000 km)
Change the front axle fluid - Four-wheel drive
vehicles.
Change the rear axle fluid.
Change the transfer case fluid - Four-wheel
drive vehicles.
480
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Change the engine coolant.
3
Every 200,000 mi (320,000 km)
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
3
Initial replacement at ten years or 200,000 mi (320,000 km), then every five years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the message
appearing in the information display
prompting you to change your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not
come on, but the odometer reads
30,000 mi (48,000 km) (for example,
the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was
reset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)).
Perform the engine air filter
replacement.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints (if equipped with grease
fittings).
Inspect frequently, service
as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
481
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
1
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
1
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Off-road Operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate
if equipped with grease fittings.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.
1
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
482
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
Off-road Operation
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
1
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case (Four-wheel
drive vehicles) fluid changes or level
checks are not required unless a leak is
suspected or the assembly has been
submerged in water. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1,800 mi (2,900 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD
After the scheduled maintenance services
are performed, record the Repair Order #,
Distance and Engine Hours in the boxes
provided.
483
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
484
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
485
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
486
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
487
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
488
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
489
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
490
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
491
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
492
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
493
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Scheduled Maintenance
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from
any electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
applicable local legislation and other
requirements. Installation of some
aftermarket electronic devices could
degrade the performance of vehicle
functions, which use radio frequency signals
such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
pressure monitoring system, push button
start, Bluetooth connectivity or satellite
navigation.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following illustrations and table. We do not
provide any other special provisions or
conditions for installations or use.
Car/SUV
E239120
494
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
495
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
Frequency Band
MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
496
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
497
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
498
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
499
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
500
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
501
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
502
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
503
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’ s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
504
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
505
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
506
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
507
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
508
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
509
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
510
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
511
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
512
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Argen-
tina
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
513
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
is conditioned on Client’ s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
514
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
515
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
516
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
517
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
518
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
519
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
520
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
521
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY
Your vehicle could have components that
transmit and receive radio waves and are
therefore subject to government
regulation.
These components must accept any
interference received, including
interference that could cause undesired
operation. For certification labels and
declarations of conformity, visit
www.wirelessconformity.ford.com.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY - VEHICLES WITH: SYNC 3
Radio Frequency Statement
IC Identification NumberFCC Identification NumberSYNC Version
216B-SYNCG3-LACJ-SYNCG3-L3.0
216B-FA170BCARHSACJ-FA-170-BCARHS3.1
216B-FG185SG32MHACJ-FG-185-SG32MH3.2
522
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
These devices comply with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. The device does not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device accepts any interference
received, including interference that
could cause undesired operation.
523
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Appendices
524
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
3
360 Degree Camera...................................233
Advanced Camera Views................................233
Camera Views.....................................................233
Front Camera......................................................234
Keep Out Zone....................................................234
Side Camera........................................................234
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive....................................200
A
A/C
See: Climate Control.........................................139
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes..........................................................209
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...............................................................209
Accessories.....................................................472
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................14
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............237
Active Park Assist.........................................223
Using Active Park Assist..................................224
Adjustable Pedals...........................................91
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................337
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................338
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................337
Adjusting the Pedals......................................91
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................87
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................87
End of Travel Position........................................88
Memory Feature...................................................88
Airbag Disposal...............................................55
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control.........................................139
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............329
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................83
Ambient Lighting...........................................98
Adjusting the Brightness...................................98
Switching Ambient Lighting Off.....................98
Switching Ambient Lighting On.....................98
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................83
Arming the Alarm................................................84
Disarming the Alarm...........................................84
Using the System.................................................83
Appendices....................................................494
Apps.................................................................454
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................456
Using Apps on an Android Device...............455
Using Apps on an iOS Device........................455
Using Mobile Navigation on an Android
Device...............................................................455
At a Glance........................................................18
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............113
Direction Indicator Tone....................................113
Headlamps On Warning Tone.........................113
Key in Ignition Warning Tone...........................113
Keyless Warning Alert........................................113
Parking Brake On Warning Tone....................113
Audio Control..................................................88
You can operate the following functions
with the control:..............................................88
Audio System...............................................398
General Information.........................................398
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Touchscreen
Display...........................................................401
Accessing the Sound Settings......................401
Adjusting the Volume.......................................401
Changing Radio Stations...............................402
Muting the Audio...............................................402
Playing or Pausing Media...............................402
Setting the Memory Presets.........................402
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off........402
Switching the Display On and Off..............402
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse.............................................................402
Audio Unit - Vehicles Without:
Touchscreen Display...............................398
Accessing the Settings Menu.......................399
Accessing the Sound Settings.....................399
Adjusting the Volume......................................399
525
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Changing Radio Stations...............................399
Playing or Pausing Media..............................400
Returning to the Previous Screen...............400
Scrolling Through the Menu Options........400
Selecting a Menu Option...............................400
Selecting Media.................................................400
Selecting the Radio..........................................400
Setting a Memory Preset...............................400
Switching the Audio Unit On and
Off......................................................................400
Using a Cell Phone...........................................400
Using Apps..........................................................400
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse..............................................................401
Autolamps........................................................95
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................95
Automatic Climate Control........................141
Accessing Rear Climate Controls..................141
Directing the Airflow...........................................141
Setting the Blower Motor Speed...................141
Setting the Temperature..................................141
Switching Auto Mode On and Off.................141
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off........................................................................142
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off...............................................................142
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off........................................................................143
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off........................................................................143
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off........................................................................142
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off........................................................................142
Switching the Heated Seats On and
Off........................................................................143
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and
Off........................................................................143
Automatic High Beam Control.................99
Automatic High Beam Control
Indicators.......................................................99
Automatic Transmission............................193
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning............................................................199
Brake-Shift Interlock (Console Shifter
Only)..................................................................198
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or
Snow..................................................................199
SelectShift™ Automatic
Transmission....................................................197
Understanding the Shift Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission.............................193
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.............................................................333
Auto-Start-Stop............................................179
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop.............................180
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop...............................179
Autowipers........................................................92
Autowipers Settings............................................93
Auxiliary Power Points................................169
110 Volt AC Power Point...................................169
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................169
USB Port and Power Point Locations.........169
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................335
Blind Spot Information System.............249
..................................................................................249
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow......................................................................251
Switching the System On and Off...............253
System Errors......................................................253
Using the Blind Spot Information
System..............................................................250
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System..........249
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........325
Booster Seats...................................................31
Types of Booster Seats......................................32
Brake Fluid Check........................................334
Brake Fluid Service Interval............................335
Brakes..............................................................209
General Information.........................................209
Breaking-In....................................................300
Bulb Specification Chart...........................392
C
Cabin Air Filter...............................................148
Canceling the Set Speed...........................237
526
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Capacities and Specifications...............384
8.8" Rear Axle.....................................................389
9.75" Rear Axle with Limited-Slip................391
9.75" Rear Axle Without
Limited-Slip....................................................390
Air Conditioning System.................................384
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................387
Automatic Transmission................................384
Engine Coolant...................................................385
Engine Oil.............................................................386
Front Axle.............................................................389
Fuel Tank...............................................................387
Grease....................................................................387
Hydraulic Brake System..................................388
Locks......................................................................388
Transfer Case......................................................388
Washer Reservoir................................................391
Cargo Nets......................................................267
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................344
Catalytic Converter......................................190
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................191
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................191
Center Console...............................................172
Changing a Bulb..........................................340
Fog Lamp Bulb....................................................341
Front Direction Indicator Bulb......................340
Headlamp Bulb..................................................340
LED Bulbs.............................................................342
LED Direction Indicator and Side Marker
Bulbs...................................................................341
LED Foglamp......................................................340
LED Headlamp...................................................340
Rear Lamp, Brake Lamp, Rear Direction
Indicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs.........341
Changing a Fuse...........................................323
Fuses.......................................................................323
Changing a Road Wheel............................372
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................372
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools.........373
Tire Change Procedure....................................373
Changing the 12V Battery.........................335
Battery Management System.......................337
Changing the Engine Air Filter................329
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password...................................397
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................339
Checking MyKey System Status..............66
MyKey Distance....................................................66
Number of Admin Keys......................................67
Number of MyKeys...............................................67
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................339
Childminder Mirror.......................................104
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................45
Child Restraint Positioning.........................33
Child Safety......................................................20
General Information............................................20
Child Safety Locks.........................................35
Left-Hand Side.....................................................36
Right-Hand Side...................................................36
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................347
Cleaning Products.......................................343
Materials...............................................................343
Cleaning the Engine....................................345
Cleaning the Exterior..................................344
Cleaning the Headlamps................................344
Exterior Chrome Parts.....................................344
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................344
Stripes or Graphics...........................................344
Underbody...........................................................345
Under Hood.........................................................345
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................346
Cleaning the Interior...................................346
Mirrors....................................................................346
Cleaning the Wheels..................................348
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................345
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................66
Climate............................................................445
Accessing Rear Climate Controls................447
Accessing the Climate Control Menu........445
Directing the Airflow.........................................445
Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator..........447
Setting the Blower Motor Speed.................445
Setting the Temperature................................445
Switching Auto Mode On and Off...............445
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off......................................................................446
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off.............................................................446
527
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off......................................................................446
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and
Off.......................................................................447
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off.......................................................................447
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off......................................................................445
Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On
and Off.............................................................446
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off......................................................................446
Switching the Heated Exterior Mirrors On
and Off.............................................................446
Switching the Heated Rear Window On and
Off......................................................................446
Switching the Heated Seats On and
Off......................................................................446
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On
and Off.............................................................446
Switching the Heated Windshield On and
Off......................................................................446
Switching the Rear Climate Controlled
Seats On and Off..........................................447
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and
Off.......................................................................447
Switching the Rear Ventilated Seats On
and Off..............................................................447
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and
Off.......................................................................447
Climate Control.............................................139
Climate Controlled Seats..........................163
Automatic Climate Controlled Seats..........163
Heated Seats........................................................163
Ventilated Seats..................................................163
Connected Vehicle......................................394
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network............................................................394
Connected Vehicle Limitations..............394
Connected Vehicle Requirements........394
Connected Vehicle –
Troubleshooting........................................395
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Network........................................................394
Connecting FordPass to the Modem.........394
Enabling and Disabling the Modem...........394
What Is the Modem..........................................394
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network........................................................394
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................329
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......54
Creating a MyKey...........................................65
Programming and Changing Configurable
Settings..............................................................66
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot..........397
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot.............................................................397
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and
Password..........................................................397
Cross Traffic Alert........................................253
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When Trailer
is Attached......................................................255
Cross Traffic Alert Indicator...........................255
Cross Traffic Alert Information
Messages.........................................................256
Cross Traffic Alert System
Limitations.......................................................255
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors............255
Switching the System On and Off..............255
Using Cross Traffic Alert..................................253
Cruise Control...............................................236
Cruise Control Indicators...........................237
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control..............................................89
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control............................................................89
Customer Assistance................................308
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Comfort, Convenience and Entertainment
Data........................................................................11
Event Data.................................................................11
Service Data............................................................10
Services That Third Parties Provide...............12
Services That We Provide..................................12
Vehicles With a Modem......................................12
Vehicles With an Emergency Call
System..................................................................13
Vehicles With SYNC.............................................12
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running
Lamps.............................................................96
528
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)............96
Declaration of Conformity........................522
Declaration of Conformity - Vehicles
With: SYNC 3..............................................522
Radio Frequency Statement.........................522
Digital Radio..................................................402
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................403
Direction Indicators........................................97
Doors and Locks.............................................69
Drive Control...................................................261
Selectable Drive Modes...................................261
Driver Alert.....................................................244
Using Driver Alert...............................................244
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................49
Children and Airbags..........................................50
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................49
Driving Aids....................................................244
Driving Hints..................................................299
Driving Through Water..............................300
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running
Lamps.................................................................96
See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)................96
E
Economical Driving.....................................299
Electric Parking Brake.................................210
Applying the Electric Parking Brake.............210
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake....................................................211
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake..................................................................210
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the
Vehicle Battery is Running Out of
Charge.................................................................211
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............494
Emission Law.................................................189
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance.........190
Tampering With a Noise Control
System..............................................................189
End User License Agreement..................497
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................497
Engine Block Heater.....................................177
Using the Engine Block Heater......................178
Engine Coolant Check...............................329
Adding Coolant..................................................330
Coolant Change..................................................332
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................333
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................332
Recycled Coolant................................................331
Severe Climates..................................................331
Engine Emission Control...........................189
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................81
Engine Oil Check...........................................327
Adding Engine Oil...............................................327
Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................327
Engine Specifications................................380
Drivebelt Routing..............................................380
Entertainment..............................................435
AM/FM Radio......................................................436
Apps.......................................................................444
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................443
CD............................................................................442
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)........................................................439
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)........................................................437
Sources..................................................................435
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................444
USB Ports.............................................................444
Environment......................................................17
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake.............................210
Essential Towing Checks..........................289
Before Towing a Trailer....................................294
Hitches..................................................................290
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)........................................295
Safety Chains.......................................................291
Trailer Brakes........................................................291
Trailer Hitch Cover.............................................289
Trailer Lamps......................................................294
529
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector)......................................................289
When Towing a Trailer.....................................295
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options.................................16
Exterior Mirrors..............................................102
360-Degree Camera.........................................103
Auto-Dimming Feature....................................103
Auto-Folding Mirrors.........................................102
Blind Spot Monitor.............................................103
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.............................102
Heated Exterior Mirrors....................................103
Memory Mirrors...................................................103
Power Exterior Mirrors.......................................102
Puddle Lamps ....................................................103
Signal Indicator Mirrors....................................103
F
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................38
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.....................................41
Seatbelt Locking Modes...................................40
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................39
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................372
Floor Mats......................................................300
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................96
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals..................................91
Ford Credit.........................................................13
US Only.....................................................................13
Ford Protect...................................................473
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)...........................................474
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................473
Four-Wheel Drive........................................200
Front Fog Lamps............................................96
Front Fog Lamp Indicator..................................97
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On or
Off.........................................................................96
Front Parking Aid.........................................220
Object Distance Indicator................................221
Front Passenger Sensing System............50
Fuel and Refueling.......................................182
Fuel Consumption........................................187
Advertised Capacity...........................................187
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................188
Filling the Fuel Tank..........................................188
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................183
Fuel Filter........................................................339
Fuel Quality.....................................................182
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................182
Fuel Shutoff...................................................303
Fuse Box Locations......................................315
Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................315
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............315
Fuses.................................................................315
Fuse Specification Chart...........................315
Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................315
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............321
G
Garage Door Opener...................................165
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........165
Gauges..............................................................107
4 Inch Display.......................................................107
8 Inch Display......................................................108
Configurable Gauge..........................................109
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........109
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge.............................109
Fuel Gauge............................................................109
Gearbox
See: Transmission..............................................193
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................56
Intelligent Access.................................................56
General Maintenance Information........475
Multi-Point Inspection......................................477
Owner Checks and Services..........................476
Protecting Your Investment...........................475
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................475
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................475
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada...........................................................311
Getting the Services You Need..............308
Away From Home.............................................308
Global Opening and Closing.....................101
Closing the Windows........................................102
Opening the Windows......................................102
530
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
H
Hazard Flashers...........................................303
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................337
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................95
Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp.........................340
Headrest
See: Head Restraints........................................150
Head Restraints............................................150
Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................151
Front Seat Manual Head Restraints.............151
Heated Exterior Mirrors..............................148
Heated Rear Window..................................148
Heated Steering Wheel...............................89
Heated Windshield.......................................147
Windshield Wiper De-Icer................................147
Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................139
Hill Descent Control.....................................217
Principle of Operation........................................217
Hill Start Assist...............................................211
Switching the System On and Off................212
Using Hill Start Assist........................................212
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Automatic
Temperature Control................................143
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................144
General Hints........................................................143
Quickly Cooling the Interior............................144
Quickly Heating the Interior............................144
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........144
Recommended Settings for Heating..........144
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
- Vehicles With: Manual Temperature
Control...........................................................144
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................145
General Hints.......................................................144
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................145
Quickly Heating the Interior............................144
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........145
Recommended Settings for Heating..........145
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods
During Extreme High Ambient
Temperatures..................................................145
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................209
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........325
Horn....................................................................90
I
Ignition Switch................................................173
In California (U.S. Only)............................309
Information Display Control......................89
Information Displays....................................114
General Information...........................................114
Information Messages................................123
Active Park.............................................................123
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................124
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control..............124
Airbag......................................................................125
Alarm and Security.............................................125
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................125
Battery and Charging System........................126
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System....................................................126
Doors and Locks..................................................127
Driver Alert.............................................................127
Drivetrain................................................................128
Engine.....................................................................129
Four-Wheel Drive................................................129
Fuel..........................................................................130
Keys and Intelligent Access............................130
Lane Keeping System.........................................131
Maintenance..........................................................131
MyKey......................................................................132
Off Road.................................................................132
Park Aid...................................................................133
Park Brake.............................................................134
Power Steering....................................................134
Pre-Collision Assist............................................135
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™.............................135
Remote Start........................................................136
Seats.......................................................................136
Starting System ..................................................137
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................137
Trailer.......................................................................137
Transmission........................................................138
Installing Child Restraints...........................22
Child Seats..............................................................22
531
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats....................................................................28
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................22
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................27
Using Tether Straps.............................................28
Instrument Cluster.......................................107
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................95
Instrument Panel............................................18
Interior Lamps.................................................97
Front Interior Lamp..............................................97
Interior Lamp Function......................................98
Rear Interior Lamps............................................98
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
Off.........................................................................97
Switching All of the Interior Lamps On........97
Switching the Individual Map Lamps On
and Off.................................................................97
Interior Mirror..................................................103
Automatic Dimming Mirror.............................104
Manual Dimming Mirror...................................104
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................304
Connecting the Jumper Cables....................304
Jump Starting.....................................................305
Preparing Your Vehicle....................................304
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................305
K
Keyless Entry....................................................72
Displaying the Factory-Set Code....................74
Locking and Unlocking.......................................74
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD...............................................................72
Keyless Starting.............................................173
Ignition Modes......................................................174
Keys and Remote Controls.........................56
L
Lane Keeping System................................245
Switching the System On and Off..............246
System Display....................................................247
System Settings.................................................246
Troubleshooting.................................................248
Liftgate...............................................................76
Liftgate Window...........................................106
Opening the Liftgate Window.......................106
Lighting Control..............................................94
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............95
Headlamp High Beam........................................94
Lighting..............................................................94
General Information............................................94
Limited Slip Differential............................208
Locking Function...............................................208
Spare Tire.............................................................208
Trailer Towing.....................................................208
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers............268
Load Carrying................................................265
Load Limit......................................................269
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles.............................................................273
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................269
Locking and Unlocking................................69
Activating Intelligent Access............................70
Autolock....................................................................71
Battery Saver..........................................................72
Illuminated Entry...................................................72
Illuminated Exit......................................................72
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade.............................................................71
Power Door Locks................................................69
Remote Control....................................................69
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter..........................................................71
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys........................................................................71
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................372
M
Maintenance..................................................325
General Information.........................................325
Manual Climate Control.............................139
Directing the Airflow..........................................139
Locking the Rear Climate Control................140
Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................139
532
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Setting the Rear Blower Motor
Speed.................................................................140
Setting the Rear Temperature.......................140
Setting the Temperature.................................139
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On
and Off..............................................................140
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off.......................................................................140
Switching Recirculated Air On and
Off.......................................................................140
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off.......................................................................139
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off.......................................................................140
Switching the Rear Climate Control On and
Off.......................................................................140
Manual Liftgate...............................................76
Closing the Liftgate..............................................77
Opening the Liftgate...........................................76
Manual Seats.................................................154
Manual Lumbar ..................................................154
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................154
Recline Adjustment...........................................154
Memory Function..........................................157
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................158
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key
Fob.......................................................................157
Saving a PreSet Position..................................157
Message Center
See: Information Displays................................114
Mirrors
See: Windows and Mirrors...............................101
Mobile Communications Equipment.......15
Moonroof.........................................................105
Bounce-Back.......................................................106
Opening and Closing the Moonroof............105
Motorcraft Parts..........................................380
MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................67
MyKey™.............................................................64
Principle of Operation........................................64
N
Navigation......................................................449
Changing the Format of the Map.................451
cityseeker..............................................................453
Michelin Travel Guide.......................................454
Navigation Map Accuracy and
Updates............................................................454
Route Guidance...................................................451
Setting a Destination.......................................450
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................454
Zoom.......................................................................451
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........478
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor.............................478
Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................479
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................328
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................327
Opening and Closing the Hood..............325
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.......................................................313
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual...........313
Overhead Console........................................172
Overriding Automatic High Beam
Control............................................................99
P
Parking Aids....................................................218
Principle of Operation.......................................218
Passive Anti-Theft System..........................81
SecuriLock™...........................................................81
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................81
Perchlorate........................................................13
Personal Safety System™..........................47
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................47
Phone...............................................................447
Android Auto.......................................................449
Apple CarPlay.....................................................449
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................448
Text Messaging..................................................448
Using Your Cell Phone.....................................448
Post-Crash Alert System..........................306
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................69
Power Liftgate..................................................77
Obstacle Detection..............................................79
533
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................78
Opening the Liftgate Window.........................79
Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................79
Stopping the Liftgate Movement...................79
Switching the Power Liftgate On or
Off........................................................................80
Using the Hands-Free Liftgate.......................80
Power Running Boards................................85
Power Seats...................................................154
Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................155
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats
With Active Motion .......................................155
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................335
Power Windows.............................................101
Accessory...............................................................101
Bounce-Back........................................................101
One-Touch Down................................................101
One-Touch Up......................................................101
Window Lock........................................................101
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................257
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings............................................................259
Blocked Sensors................................................260
Distance Indication and Alert.......................258
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System..............................................................258
Protecting the Environment........................17
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................372
R
Rear Axle........................................................208
Rear Parking Aid............................................219
Object Distance Indicator...............................220
Rear Passenger Climate Controls -
Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control...........................................................145
Directing Air to the Overhead Air
Vents...................................................................145
Directing Air to the Rear Footwell Air
Vents...................................................................145
Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator...........145
Setting the Rear Blower Motor
Speed.................................................................146
Setting the Rear Temperature.......................146
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and
Off.......................................................................146
Switching the Rear Climate Control On and
Off.......................................................................146
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and
Off.......................................................................146
Rear Passenger Climate Controls -
Vehicles With: Manual Temperature
Control...........................................................146
Directing Air to the Overhead Air
Vents..................................................................146
Directing Air to the Rear Footwell Air
Vents...................................................................147
Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator............147
Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed........147
Setting the Rear Temperature........................147
Switching the Rear Climate Control On and
Off........................................................................147
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and
Off........................................................................147
Rear Seats.......................................................158
Adjusting the Manual Second Row
Outermost Seats for Easy Entry..............159
Adjusting the Second Row Center
Seat......................................................................161
Adjusting the Second Row Outermost
Seats for Easy Exit........................................160
Folding the Power Rear Seats........................161
Folding the Second Row Center Seat
..............................................................................160
Folding the Second Row Outermost Seats
..............................................................................158
Reclining the Second Row Outermost Seat
Backrest............................................................160
Rear Under Floor Storage.........................265
Advanced System: Forward Divider, Cargo
Shelf and Rear Barrier (Bulkhead
Position)..........................................................266
Cargo Management System.........................265
Rear View Camera......................................230
Camera Guidelines.............................................231
Manual Zoom......................................................232
Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................232
Rear Camera Delay............................................232
Using the Rear View Camera
System..............................................................230
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera...................................230
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........93
Rear Window Washer.........................................93
534
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Rear Window Wiper Blade...............................93
Recommended Towing Weights...........286
Reduced Engine Performance...............299
Refueling..........................................................185
Refueling System Overview...........................185
Refueling System Warning..............................187
Refueling Your Vehicle......................................185
Remote Control..............................................56
Car Finder.................................................................61
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter....................56
Intelligent Access Key.........................................57
Remote Start..........................................................61
Replacing the Battery.........................................58
Sounding the Panic Alarm.................................61
Using the Key Blade............................................58
Remote Start.................................................148
Automatic Settings............................................148
Heated and Cooled Features.........................149
Last Settings........................................................149
Removing a Headlamp.............................340
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............348
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................14
Collision Repairs....................................................14
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................14
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................14
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................63
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...............................................................313
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)...............................................................313
Resuming the Set Speed...........................237
Roadside Assistance..................................302
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................303
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................302
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................302
Roadside Emergencies..............................302
Roof Racks and Load Carriers................268
Adjusting the Crossbar....................................269
Maximum Recommended Load
Amounts..........................................................268
Running-In
See: Breaking-In................................................300
Running Out of Fuel....................................183
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................184
Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................183
S
Safety Canopy™.............................................53
Safety Precautions.......................................182
Satellite Radio..............................................405
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)................................................................406
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............405
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service.................405
Troubleshooting................................................406
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........483
Scheduled Maintenance...........................475
Seatbelt Extensions......................................45
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................42
Seatbelt Reminder........................................43
Front Seats.............................................................43
Seatbelt Monitor..................................................44
Seatbelt Status.....................................................44
Seatbelts............................................................37
Principle of Operation.........................................37
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................43
Conditions of operation.....................................43
Seats.................................................................150
Security...............................................................81
Settings............................................................457
911 Assist...............................................................457
Ambient Lighting...............................................458
Audio.......................................................................457
Automatic Updates...........................................457
Bluetooth..............................................................457
Charge Settings.................................................458
Clock.......................................................................457
Display...................................................................458
Driver Assist..........................................................457
FordPass................................................................457
General..................................................................457
Message Center.................................................458
Mobile Apps.........................................................457
Multi Contour Seats.........................................458
Navigation............................................................458
Personal Profiles................................................458
Phone.....................................................................457
535
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Seats......................................................................458
Sound.....................................................................457
Valet Mode...........................................................458
Vehicle....................................................................457
Voice Control......................................................458
Setting the Cruise Control Speed..........236
Changing the Set Speed.................................236
Side Airbags.....................................................52
Side Sensing System..................................222
Object Distance Indicator...............................223
Sitting in the Correct Position..................150
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................367
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................372
Special Notices................................................14
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................14
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Utility Type Vehicles........................................15
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................15
Special Instructions..............................................14
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance............15
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow...........15
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................481
Exceptions...........................................................483
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................236
Stability Control............................................214
Principle of Operation.......................................214
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch............................................173
Starting a Gasoline Engine........................174
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................175
Failure to Start......................................................175
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.................177
Important Ventilating Information................177
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving................................................................176
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................176
Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................174
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................175
Starting and Stopping the Engine..........173
General Information...........................................173
Steering...........................................................256
Adaptive Learning..............................................257
Electric Power Steering...................................256
Steering Wheel................................................87
Storage Compartments..............................172
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.....................................................105
Sun Visors.......................................................104
Illuminated Vanity Mirror.................................105
Supplementary Restraints System.........48
Principle of Operation........................................48
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
On and Off.....................................................99
Activating the Automatic High Beam
Control................................................................99
Switching Cruise Control On and
Off..................................................................236
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................236
Switching Cruise Control On.........................236
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ 3........................................................426
General Information.........................................426
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................459
Additional Information and
Assistance.........................................................471
Apps.......................................................................466
Navigation............................................................465
Personal Profiles...............................................469
Phone.....................................................................463
Resetting the System........................................471
USB and Bluetooth Audio.............................460
Voice Recognition.............................................459
Wi-Fi Connectivity............................................468
SYNC™ Applications and Services.......413
911 Assist................................................................413
SYNC Mobile Apps.............................................415
SYNC™...........................................................409
General Information........................................409
SYNC™ Troubleshooting...........................417
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications...........380
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................310
Tire Care..........................................................353
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................354
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................353
536
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................355
Temperature A B C............................................354
Traction AA A B C...............................................353
Treadwear.............................................................353
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........368
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................370
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................370
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................351
Towing a Trailer.............................................275
Load Placement.................................................275
Towing Points................................................307
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels.........................................................296
Four-wheel-down Towing.............................296
Recreational Towing........................................296
Towing..............................................................275
Traction Control.............................................213
Principle of Operation.......................................213
Trailer Reversing Aids.................................276
Principle of Operation......................................276
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™............................276
Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup Assist..........276
Troubleshooting..................................................281
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist...................280
Trailer Sway Control...................................285
Transfer Case Fluid Check........................334
Transmission Code Designation............383
Transmission..................................................193
Transporting the Vehicle..........................306
U
Under Hood Overview...............................326
Unique Driving Characteristics................179
Universal Garage Door Opener...............165
HomeLink Wireless Control System...........165
USB Port.........................................................407
Locating the USB Ports..................................408
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................237
Automatic Cancellation..................................240
Blocked Sensor...................................................242
Canceling the Set Speed................................240
Changing the Set Speed.................................240
Detection Issues..................................................241
Following a Vehicle...........................................238
Following a Vehicle to a Complete
Stop...................................................................239
Hilly Condition Usage........................................241
Overriding the Set Speed...............................240
Park Brake Application.....................................241
Resuming the Set Speed................................240
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............238
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When
Your Vehicle is Stationary..........................238
Setting the Gap Distance...............................239
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off........................................................................241
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On.......................................................................238
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........243
System Not Available.......................................242
Using Four-Wheel Drive...........................200
4WD Switch Selections..................................200
4X4 Indicator Lights.........................................200
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles............................................................203
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles............................................................202
Operating 4WD Vehicles With Spare or
Mismatched Tires.........................................202
Using Hill Descent Control.........................217
Hill Descent Modes.............................................217
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...........................................................67
Using Power Running Boards....................85
Automatic Power Deploy..................................85
Automatic Power Stow.....................................85
Bounce-back.........................................................86
Enabling and Disabling......................................85
Manual Power Deploy........................................85
Using Snow Chains.....................................367
Using Stability Control................................215
Stability Control and Traction Control with
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC™)..............215
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player.............................................................416
Audio Voice Commands...................................417
Media Sources.....................................................416
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone.............412
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu...................................................................413
Pairing a Phone...................................................412
537
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Phone Controls....................................................413
Phone Voice Commands.................................412
Using Traction Control................................213
Switching the System Off ...............................213
System Indicator Lights and
Messages..........................................................213
Using Voice Recognition............................410
Audio Voice Commands.................................429
Climate Voice Commands.............................430
Initiating a Voice Session................................410
Mobile App Voice Commands......................433
Navigation Voice Commands.......................432
Phone Voice Commands...............................430
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.....................................................434
System Interaction and Feedback................411
Voice Settings Commands............................434
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)...........................311
V
Vehicle Care...................................................343
General Information.........................................343
Vehicle Certification Label.......................383
Vehicle Identification Number................382
Vehicle Storage............................................348
Body.......................................................................348
Brakes....................................................................349
Cooling system...................................................349
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery.............349
Engine....................................................................349
Fuel system.........................................................349
General..................................................................348
Miscellaneous.....................................................349
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................349
Tires........................................................................349
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot................................397
Ventilation
See: Climate Control.........................................139
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............382
Voice Control...................................................89
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators................110
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator.................110
Airbag Warning Lamp........................................110
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Lamp...................................................................110
Automatic Headlamp High Beam
Indicator.............................................................110
Auto-Start-Stop Indicator...............................110
Battery.....................................................................110
Blind Spot Information System
Indicator.............................................................110
Brake System Warning Lamp...........................111
Cruise Control Indicator......................................111
Direction Indicator................................................111
Door Ajar Warning Lamp....................................111
Electric Park Brake................................................111
Electronic Limited Slip Differential................111
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp.....................................................................111
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp......................111
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators.............................111
Front Fog Lamp Indicator.................................112
Headlamp High Beam Indicator.....................112
Hill Descent............................................................112
Hood Ajar................................................................112
Liftgate Ajar Warning Lamp.............................112
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp........................112
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp..................112
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp.............................112
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control...........112
Service Engine Soon...........................................112
Stability Control and Traction Control
Indicator..............................................................113
Stability Control and Traction Control Off
Warning Lamp..................................................113
Tow Haul Indicator..............................................113
Washer Fluid Check....................................338
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................344
See: Wipers and Washers.................................92
Waxing.............................................................345
What Is Automatic High Beam
Control............................................................99
What Is Cruise Control...............................236
Requirements......................................................236
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................372
Wheels and Tires..........................................351
General Information..........................................351
538
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
Technical Specifications.................................378
Windows and Mirrors...................................101
Windshield Washers.....................................93
Front Camera Washer........................................93
Windshield Wipers.........................................92
Speed Dependent Wipers................................92
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................339
Wipers and Washers.....................................92
Wireless Accessory Charger.....................170
539
Expedition (TB8) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201907, Third-Printing-
Index
